SPS-300 Series
SAM4s SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register
Operator’s and
Programming Manual
SPS-320 Shown Above with Optional Card Reader
All specifications are subject to change without notice
©2013 CRS, Inc.
SPS-300 v1.20
CRS, Inc.
Limited Warranty and Disclaimers of Warranty
This manual has been developed by CRS, Inc. It is intended for the use of its customers and service personnel and should be read in
its entirety before attempting to install, use or program the product(s).
Nothing contained in this manual shall be deemed to be, and this manual does not constitute, a warranty of, or representation with
respect to, the product or any of the products to which this manual applies. This manual is subject to change without notice and CRS,
Inc. has no obligation to provide any updates or corrections to this manual. Further, CRS, Inc. also reserves the right, without prior
notice, to make changes in equipment design or components as it deems appropriate. No representation is made that this manual is
complete or accurate in all respects and CRS, Inc. shall not be liable for any errors or omissions contained in this manual. In no event
shall CRS, Inc. be liable for any incidental or consequential damages relating to or arising out of the use of this manual. This
document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this document may be
photocopied or reproduced without prior written consent of CRS, Inc.
NOTICE
IF ANY WARRANTY IS EXTENDED TO YOU WITH REGARD TO THE PRODUCT(S) TO WHICH THIS MANUAL APPLIES,
IT IS A WARRANTY FROM THE ENTITY OR INDIVIDUAL FROM WHOM YOU DIRECTLY PURCHASED THE
PRODUCT(S).
SUBJECT TO THE FOREGOING, UNLESS YOU ARE A DIRECT END USER CUSTOMER OF CRS, INC., CRS, INC. DOES
NOT EXTEND TO YOU ANY EXPRESS WARRANTY OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR USE, OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR
ANY WARRANTY OF NON-INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IN CONNECTION WITH THE
PRODUCT(S) OR ANY SOFTWARE, DRIVERS, OR PROGRAMMING PRODUCT, WHETHER EMBEDDED IN PRODUCT(S)
OR PROVIDED AS A SEPARATE PROGRAM, OR USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THIS/THESE PRODUCT(S). CRS, INC.
SPECIFICALLY DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE OPERATION OF ANY DRIVERS, SOFTWARE, OR PROGRAMMING
PRODUCTS LICENSED HEREUNDER, WHETHER EMBEDDED IN PRODUCTS OR PROVIDED AS SEPARATE
PROGRAMS, SHALL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE OR THAT FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN SUCH DRIVERS,
SOFTWARE OR PROGRAMMING PRODUCTS SHALL OPERATE IN COMBINATION(S) WHICH MAY BE SELECTED FOR
USE BY YOU OR OTHERWISE MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS.
CRS, Inc. is not responsible for any damages or loss, either direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential, which you may
experience as a result of your purchase or use of the product(s). Your sole remedy in the event that you encounter any difficulties
with the product(s) is against the entity or individual from whom you purchased the product(s).
Revision 2.0 - April 1, 2005
WARNING - U.S.
THIS EQUIPMENT GENERATES, USES AND CAN RADIATE RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY, AND IF NOT INSTALLED AND USED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL, MAY CAUSE INTERFERENCE TO RADIO COMMUNICATIONS. IT HAS BEEN
TESTED AND FOUND TO COMPLY WITH THE LIMITS FOR A CLASS A COMPUTING DEVICE PURSUANT TO SUBPART J OF PART 15
OF FCC RULES WHICH ARE DESIGNED TO PROVIDE REASONABLE PROTECTION AGAINST SUCH INTERFERENCE WHEN
OPERATED IN A COMMERCIAL ENVIRONMENT. OPERATIONS OF THE EQUIPMENT IN A RESIDENTIAL AREA IS LIKELY TO CAUSE
INTERFERENCE IN WHICH CASE THE USER, AT HIS OWN EXPENSE, WILL BE REQUIRED TO TAKE WHATEVER MEASURES MAY BE
REQUIRED TO CORRECT THE INTERFERENCE.
NOTICE - CANADA
THIS APPARATUS COMPLIES WITH THE CLASS “A” LIMITS FOR RADIO INTERFERENCE AS SPECIFIED IN THE CANADIAN
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS RADIO INTERFERENCE REGULATIONS.
CET APPAREIL EST CONFORME AUX NORMES CLASS “A” D’INTERFERENCE RADIO TEL QUE SPECIFIER PAR MINISTRE
CANADIEN DES COMMUNICATIONS DANS LES REGLEMENTS D’INTERFERENCE RADIO.
ATTENTION
The product that you have purchased may contain a battery that may be recyclable. At the end of its useful life, under various state and local laws, it
may be illegal to dispose of the battery into the municipal waste system.
Check with your local solid waste officials for details concerning recycling options or proper disposal.
Precaution Statements
Follow these safety, servicing and ESD precautions to prevent damage and to protect against potential hazards such as
electrical shock.
1-1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Safety Precautions
Be sure that all built-in protective devices are
replaced. Restore any missing protective shields.
When reinstalling the chassis and its assemblies, be
sure to restore all protective devices, including
nonmetallic control knobs and compartment
covers.
Make sure there are no cabinet openings through
which people - particularly children - might insert
fingers and contact dangerous voltages. Such
openings include excessively wide cabinet
ventilation slots and improperly fitted covers and
drawers.
Design Alteration Warning:
Never alter or add to the mechanical or electrical
design of the SECR. Unauthorized alterations
might create a safety hazard. Also, any design
changes or additions will void the manufacturer’s
warranty.
Components, parts and wiring that appear to have
overheated or that are otherwise damaged should
be replaced with parts that meet the original
specifications. Always determine the cause of
damage or over- heating, and correct any potential
hazards.
Observe the original lead dress, especially near the
following areas: sharp edges, and especially the
AC and high voltage supplies. Always inspect for
pinched, out-of-place, or frayed wiring. Do not
change the spacing between components and the
printed circuit board. Check the AC power cord
for damage. Make sure that leads and components
do not touch thermally hot parts.
7.
Product Safety Notice:
Some electrical and mechanical parts have special
safety-related characteristics that might not be
obvious from visual inspection. These safety
features and the protection they give might be lost
if the replacement component differs from the
original - even if the replacement is rated for
higher voltage, wattage, etc.
Components that are critical for safety are
indicated in the circuit diagram by shading, ( )
or ( ). Use replacement components that have
the same ratings, especially for flame resistance
and dielectric strength specifications. A
replacement part that does not have the same safety
characteristics as the original might create shock,
fire or other hazards.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose used batteries according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
ATTENTION
ll y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement
incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type
ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par le
constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
 3
1-2
Servicing Precautions
WARNING:
First read the-Safety Precautions-section of this manual. If some unforeseen circumstance creates a
conflict between the servicing and safety precautions, always follow the safety precautions.
WARNING:
1.
2.
3.
4.
An electrolytic capacitor installed with the wrong polarity might explode.
Servicing precautions are printed on the cabinet.
Follow them.
Always unplug the units AC power cord from the
AC power source before attempting to:
(a) Remove or reinstall any component or
assembly
(b) Disconnect an electrical plug or connector
(c) Connect a test component in parallel with an
electrolytic capacitor
Some components are raised above the printed
circuit board for safety. An insulation tube or tape
is sometimes used. The internal wiring is
sometimes clamped to prevent contact with
thermally hot components. Reinstall all such
elements to their original position.
After servicing, always check that the screws,
components and wiring have been correctly
reinstalled. Make sure that the portion around the
serviced part has not been damaged.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Check the insulation between the blades of the AC
plug and accessible conductive parts (examples :
metal panels and input terminals).
Insulation Checking Procedure: Disconnect the
power cord from the AC source and turn the power
switch ON. Connect an insulation resistance meter
(500V) to the blades of AC plug.
The insulation resistance between each blade of the
AC plug and accessible conductive parts (see
above) should be greater than 1 megohm.
Never defeat any of the B+ voltage interlocks. Do
not apply AC power to the unit (or any of its
assemblies) unless all solid-state heat sinks are
correctly installed.
Always connect an instrument’s ground lead to the
instrument chassis ground before connecting the
positive lead ; always remove the instrument’s
ground lead last.
1-3 Precautions for Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESDs)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
4 
Some semiconductor (solid state) devices are easily
damaged by static electricity. Such components
are called Electrostatically Sensitive Devices
(ESDs); examples include integrated circuits and
some field-effect transistors. The following
techniques will reduce the occurrence of
component damage caused by static electricity.
Immediately before handling any semiconductor
components or assemblies, drain the electrostatic
charge from your body by touching a known earth
ground. Alternatively, wear a discharging wriststrap device. (Be sure to remove it prior to
applying power - this is an electric shock
precaution.)
After removing an ESD-equipped assembly, place
it on a conductive surface such as aluminum foil to
prevent accumulation of electrostatic charge.
Do not use freon-propelled chemicals. These can
generate electrical charges that damage ESDs.
Use only a grounded-tip soldering iron when
soldering or unsoldering ESDs.
Use only an anti-static solder removal device.
Many solder removal devices are not rated as antistatic; these can accumulate sufficient electrical
charge to damage ESDs.
7.
8.
9.
Do not remove a replacement ESD from its
protective package until you are ready to install it.
Most replacement ESDs are packaged with leads
that are electrically shorted together by conductive
foam, aluminum foil or other conductive materials.
Immediately before removing the protective
material from the leads of a replacement ESD,
touch the protective material to the chassis or
circuit assembly into which the device will be
installed.
Minimize body motions when handling
unpackaged replacement ESDs. Motions such as
brushing clothes together, or lifting a foot from a
carpeted floor can generate enough static
electricity to damage an ESD.
Contents
Introduction
11 About the SPS-300 Series........................................................................................................ 11 Using This Manual .................................................................................................................. 12 Using Flowcharts....................................................................................................... 12 Identifying Components & Connections ................................................................................. 13 Programmable Features ............................................................................................. 14 Display ...................................................................................................................... 15 Printer/Printers .......................................................................................................... 19 Control Lock ............................................................................................................. 20 Keyboards.................................................................................................................. 21 Initial Clear ................................................................................................................ 24 Getting Started
25 Quick Start Steps ..................................................................................................................... 25 Unpacking................................................................................................................................ 25 Installing the Paper .................................................................................................... 26 Models with Two Printer Stations ............................................................................. 27 Clearing Memory ..................................................................................................................... 30 SPS-320/SPS-340 Memory All Clear ....................................................................... 30 SPS-345 Memory All Clear....................................................................................... 32 Operations
35 Operator Display Screen .......................................................................................................... 35 Operator Display Example ........................................................................................ 36 Clerk Operations ...................................................................................................................... 37 Clerk Sign On Instructions ........................................................................................ 38 Clerk Sign Off Instructions ....................................................................................... 38 Clerk Time Keeping .................................................................................................. 39 Item Registrations .................................................................................................................... 41 Open Keyboard PLU Entry ....................................................................................... 42 Preset Price Keyboard PLU ....................................................................................... 42 Gallonage PLU Entry ................................................................................................ 42 Keyboard PLU Repeat Entry ..................................................................................... 43 Keyboard PLU Multiplication ................................................................................... 43 Keyboard PLU Multiplication with Decimal Point ................................................... 44 Split Pricing (Keyboard PLU) ................................................................................... 44 Single Item Keyboard PLU ....................................................................................... 45 Open Code Entry PLU .............................................................................................. 45 Preset Price Code Entry PLU .................................................................................... 46 Code Entry PLU Multiplication ................................................................................ 46 Code Entry PLU Multiplication with Decimal Point ................................................ 46 Split Pricing Code Entry PLU ................................................................................... 47 PLU Price Inquiry ..................................................................................................... 47 SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Contents • 5
Modifier Key ............................................................................................................. 48 Price Level Key ......................................................................................................... 49 Promo ........................................................................................................................ 50 Waste ......................................................................................................................... 50 Shifting or Exempting Tax ...................................................................................................... 51 Shifting Tax ............................................................................................................... 51 Exempting Tax .......................................................................................................... 52 Percent Key Operations ........................................................................................................... 54 Preset Percent Discount on an Item ........................................................................... 54 Enter a Percent Discount on an Item ......................................................................... 54 Percent on Sale Total ................................................................................................. 55 Coupon on Sale (Vendor Coupon) ............................................................................ 55 Coupon on Item (Store Coupon) ............................................................................... 56 Return Merchandise Registrations ........................................................................................... 57 Voids and Corrections ............................................................................................................. 58 Error Correction (Void Last Item) ............................................................................. 58 Void Previous Item .................................................................................................... 58 Cancel ........................................................................................................................ 59 Void Position Operations .......................................................................................... 59 No Sale Operations .................................................................................................................. 60 Open Drawer ............................................................................................................. 60 Non Add Number ...................................................................................................... 60 Received On Account Operations............................................................................................ 61 Paid Out Operations ................................................................................................................. 62 Subtotaling a Sale .................................................................................................................... 62 Eat In/Take Out/Drive Thru Sales ........................................................................................... 63 Totaling and Tendering............................................................................................................ 63 Totaling a Cash Sale .................................................................................................. 63 Totaling a Check Sale ................................................................................................ 63 Tendering a Cash Sale ............................................................................................... 64 Tendering a Check Sale ............................................................................................. 64 Totaling a Charge Sale .............................................................................................. 65 Tendering a Charge Sale ........................................................................................... 66 Check Cashing ........................................................................................................... 67 Split Tender ............................................................................................................... 67 Post Tender ................................................................................................................ 68 Receipt On/Off and Receipt on Request.................................................................... 68 Food Stamp Sales ...................................................................................................... 69 Currency Conversion ................................................................................................. 70 Check Tracking Operations ..................................................................................................... 71 Overview ................................................................................................................... 71 Posting Balances Manually ....................................................................................... 73 Soft Check ................................................................................................................. 75 Hard Check ................................................................................................................ 78 Fast Food Drive Thru ................................................................................................ 80 Charge Posting Operations ...................................................................................................... 81 Scale Operations ...................................................................................................................... 84 Direct Scale Entry...................................................................................................... 85 Automatic Scale Entry ............................................................................................... 85 Tare Weight Entry ..................................................................................................... 86 Manual Tare Weight Entry ........................................................................................ 87 Manual Weight Entry ................................................................................................ 88 Quick Journal Review.............................................................................................................. 88 Integrated Payment Operations ................................................................................................ 88 Not Found PLU........................................................................................................................ 89 6 • Contents
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Quick Entry Method .................................................................................................. 89 Detail Entry Method .................................................................................................. 90 Not Found PLU Report ............................................................................................. 91 Management Functions
93 Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 93 Manager Mode ......................................................................................................................... 93 Manager Operation .................................................................................................................. 94 X Reports ................................................................................................................................. 94 Declaration............................................................................................................................... 97 Register Print Format ............................................................................................................... 98 Stop Register Printing .............................................................................................................. 98 Training Mode ......................................................................................................................... 99 Electronic Journal 0peration .................................................................................................. 100 Open Check (IRC) ................................................................................................................. 101 Report Table .......................................................................................................................... 102 Z Mode
103 Reset Report Mode ................................................................................................................ 103 Z Reports ............................................................................................................................... 104 Reset Electronic Journal ........................................................................................................ 106 Mix & Match Program........................................................................................................... 106 Mix & Match Scan ................................................................................................................ 107 PLU Lookup Program ........................................................................................................... 108 Age Verification .................................................................................................................... 109 DataTran Operation Menus ................................................................................................... 110 S-Mode Programming
111 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 111 Hardware Test........................................................................................................................ 113 Hardware Test Table ............................................................................................... 113 Memory All Clear .................................................................................................................. 114 Clear All Totals ..................................................................................................................... 114 Clear Grand Total .................................................................................................................. 115 Clear PLU File ....................................................................................................................... 115 Flash ROM Information ........................................................................................................ 116 Memory Allocation ................................................................................................................ 116 Function Key Assignment ..................................................................................................... 118 Function Key Codes ................................................................................................ 120 IRC Options ........................................................................................................................... 121 RS232C Port Options ............................................................................................................ 122 RS232C Settings Screen Program Notes ................................................................. 125 SD Card Operation ................................................................................................................ 126 Program Backup and Load ...................................................................................... 128 Load/Save Receipt Images ...................................................................................... 130 Flash ROM Updates ................................................................................................ 133 Flash ROM Update by PC Utility ........................................................................... 134 Update Program Area .............................................................................................. 135 Clear Current Batch ............................................................................................................... 136 Program Mode Programming
137 Descriptor Programming Methods......................................................................................... 137 SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Contents • 7
Program Overlay Method ........................................................................................ 137 Descriptor Code Method ......................................................................................... 139 Program Mode Menu ............................................................................................................. 140 PLU Programming ................................................................................................................. 142 Add/Modify PLU..................................................................................................... 142 PLU Options - Reference Information .................................................................... 144 Delete PLU .............................................................................................................. 147 Group Programming .............................................................................................................. 150 Sales Tax Programming ......................................................................................................... 153 Programming an Add-On Tax Rate Percentage ...................................................... 153 Programming a Tax Table ....................................................................................... 154 Programming a VAT (Value Added Tax) ............................................................... 158 Programming a Canadian GST ................................................................................ 159 System Option Programming ................................................................................................. 160 System Options - Reference Information ................................................................ 165 Print Option Programming..................................................................................................... 171 Print Options - Reference Information .................................................................... 175 Clerk Programming................................................................................................................ 179 Clerk Programming - Reference Information .......................................................... 179 Function Key Programming................................................................................................... 180 #/NS ......................................................................................................................... 181 %1 -%5 .................................................................................................................... 183 ADD CHECK .......................................................................................................... 186 CANCEL ................................................................................................................. 187 CASH ...................................................................................................................... 188 CHARGE 1-8 .......................................................................................................... 189 CHECK CASHING ................................................................................................. 192 CHECK ENDORSEMENT ..................................................................................... 193 CHECK ................................................................................................................... 194 CHECK # ................................................................................................................ 196 CURRENCY CONVERSION 1-4 .......................................................................... 198 EAT-IN TAKE OUT DRIVE THRU ..................................................................... 199 ERROR CORRECT ................................................................................................ 200 FINALIZE ............................................................................................................... 201 F/S TEND ................................................................................................................ 202 FUNCTION LOOK UP (1-2) .................................................................................. 203 GUEST # ................................................................................................................. 205 LEVEL 1-5 (Price Level 1-5) .................................................................................. 206 MACRO 1-10 .......................................................................................................... 207 RETURN ................................................................................................................. 208 MODIFIER 1-5 ....................................................................................................... 209 PBAL ....................................................................................................................... 211 PAID OUT 1-3 ........................................................................................................ 212 PRINT CHECK ....................................................................................................... 213 PROMO ................................................................................................................... 214 RECD ON ACCT 1-3 .............................................................................................. 215 SCALE .................................................................................................................... 216 SERVICE ................................................................................................................ 217 TABLE .................................................................................................................... 218 TARE....................................................................................................................... 219 TAX EXEMPT ........................................................................................................ 220 TIME IN/OUT ......................................................................................................... 221 TIP ........................................................................................................................... 222 VALIDATE ............................................................................................................. 223 VOID ITEM ............................................................................................................ 224 8 • Contents
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
WASTE ................................................................................................................... 225 Logo Descriptor ..................................................................................................................... 226 Preamble .................................................................................................................. 226 Postamble ................................................................................................................ 227 Endorsement Message ............................................................................................. 229 Financial Report ...................................................................................................... 230 Clerk Report ............................................................................................................ 231 Mix & Match Name ................................................................................................ 232 DataTran .................................................................................................................. 233 NLU Code Number ............................................................................................................... 234 Download Programs .............................................................................................................. 235 Clerk In/Out ........................................................................................................................... 237 PLU Stock ............................................................................................................................. 238 Drawer Limit ......................................................................................................................... 239 Check Change Limit .............................................................................................................. 240 Time & Date .......................................................................................................................... 241 Tare Weight ........................................................................................................................... 242 Macro ..................................................................................................................................... 243 Programming a New Macro .................................................................................... 244 Editing an Existing Macro ....................................................................................... 245 Machine No. .......................................................................................................................... 246 Training Mode Password ....................................................................................................... 246 Level Activate Time .............................................................................................................. 247 Program Scans ....................................................................................................................... 248 Sample Reports
251 Financial ................................................................................................................................ 251 Time ....................................................................................................................................... 255 PLU........................................................................................................................................ 256 Clerk ...................................................................................................................................... 257 Individual Clerk ..................................................................................................................... 258 Groups ................................................................................................................................... 258 Day ........................................................................................................................................ 259 Stock ...................................................................................................................................... 259 Clerk Time Report ................................................................................................................. 260 Check File .............................................................................................................................. 261 PLU Zero Sale ....................................................................................................................... 261 Balancing Formulas ............................................................................................................... 262 Integrated Payment Appendix
263 One Day Example of Credit Authorization ........................................................................... 263 Open Batch .............................................................................................................. 263 Sample Transaction ................................................................................................. 265 Manual Card Entry .................................................................................................. 267 Merchandise Return ................................................................................................ 269 Void Transaction ..................................................................................................... 270 Local Total Report................................................................................................... 271 Tip (Gratuity) Entry................................................................................................. 271 Close Batch ............................................................................................................. 272 Integrated Payment Program Requirements .......................................................................... 273 DataTran Operation Menu ..................................................................................................... 274 Initialize EFT ........................................................................................................... 274 Change Batch Number ............................................................................................ 275 SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Contents • 9
Issue Local Total ..................................................................................................... 275 Issue Transaction ..................................................................................................... 275 Issue Batch Status .................................................................................................... 275 Dial In Load/Dial Out Load .................................................................................... 276 Tip Operation .......................................................................................................... 276 Local Transaction Report Key ............................................................................................... 277 IRC (Inter-Register Communications) Appendix
281 Overview................................................................................................................................ 281 IRC Functions ........................................................................................................................ 282 Reports..................................................................................................................... 282 Device Sharing ........................................................................................................ 282 IRC Programming & Setup.................................................................................................... 283 Communication Cable Specifications .................................................................................... 283 Communication Conduit Size .................................................................................. 283 Communication Cable Termination......................................................................... 284 Routing Communication Cable ............................................................................... 286 10 • Contents
Glossary
289 Manual Revision Record
297 SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Introduction
About the SPS-300 Series
The SPS-300 Series is offered in three configurations. There are two flat keyboard models
that work well for restaurants, food service shops, or convenience stores and a raisedkeyboard model for retail applications.
This manual includes instructions for all models. The keyboard and printer configuration
defines the model. All other features are the same, unless otherwise noted.

The SAM4s SPS-320 features a
flat 150-position keyboard
and a receipt printer.

The SAM4s SP-340 features a
flat 150-position keyboard
and receipt/journal printers.

The SAM4s SPS-345 features a
raised-key keyboard and
receipt/journal printers.
(The expanded keyboard version of the
SPS-345 is shown here.)
Photos show SPS-300 series ECRs with optional card readers.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Introduction • 11
Using This Manual
This manual provides you with a means to use your SAM4s cash register to its fullest
potential. It is divided into eight sections:
1. "Getting Started" on page 17 provides quick start steps to help you get up and running for
basic applications.
2. "Operations" on page 35 guides you through basic operation sequences.
3. "Management Functions" on page 93 explains manager controlled functions, along with
X reports and balancing information.
4. “Z Mode” on page 103 explains how to reset register reports as well as other functions
performed in this mode: mix & match discounts, PLU lookups and DataTran operations.
5. "S-Mode Programming" on page 111 provides instructions for secure programming –
usually done by the installing dealer prior to installation.
6. “Program Mode Programming” on page 137 provides complete programming
instructions, including PLU, function key programs, and system options. This section is
recommended for use by storeowners and managers. Call your SAM4s dealer if you find
you need programming assistance.
7. “Sample Reports” on page 251 provides a sample of each register report.
8. The “Integrated Payment Appendix” on page 263 provides important operation
information for users where optional integrated electronic payments are done using a
Datacap appliance.
9. The “IRC (Inter-Register Communications) Appendix” on page 281 provides notes for
IRC installations.
The SAM4s SPS-300 allows many different user applications. This manual was written with
this in mind. Although we have tried to touch on all available options, your specific
application may differ.
If you have questions concerning the configuration of your SPS-300, contact your authorized
SAM4s dealer.
Using Flowcharts
Flowcharts are used to supplement step-by-step instructions throughout this manual. For
example, the following flowchart describes how to register $1.00 into the PLU1 key:
1
0
0
PLU #1
This flowchart means:
Press numeric key 1.
Press numeric key 0.
Press numeric key 0.
Press PLU #1.
Follow the flowchart from left to right, pressing the keys in the order they are shown.
Numeric keypad entries are shown as square keys. PLU and function keys are shown as
rectangular keys.
12 • Introduction
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Identifying Components & Connections
Standard Customer Rear
Display
Printer(s)
Operator Display
SPS-320: 58mm Receipt Printer
SPS-340/SPS-345: 58mm Receipt
and Journal Printers
Adjustable 8-line, 32-character
Backlit Liquid Crystal Display
Power On/Off Switch
Cash Drawer
Sturdy Metal Cash
Drawer with media
slots and removable
5 Bill/5 Coin Drawer
Insert
7-Position Control Lock
Optional Card Reader
Keyboards
SPS-320/SPS-340: Flat spillresistant 150 position keyboard
SPS-345: Raised keyboard with
21 PLU keys expandable to a
maximum of 63 PLU key locations
Communication Ports
2-Standard RS-232C ports expandable to 4-ports
provide support for these options:
 Load cell scale
 Kitchen printer
 Bar code scanner
 Coin changer
 Pole Display
 Liquor dispensing system
 DataTran Integrated Payment Appliance
 Remote Journal or Video Surveillance System
 SPS-300 PC Utility
 SAM300 Polling Software
Power Switch Cover Options



Use pointed object to toggle on/off
Pop-out to remove the switch cover
Insert shows optional full switch
cover that is provided with
accessories
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Introduction • 13
Programmable Features

Memory Allocation System Supports:
 Over 19,000 Price Look Ups (PLUs) are available
 Up to 5 menu levels for each PLU
 Up to 99 PLU Group totals
 Up to 99 clerks with separate report totals
 Electronic Journal
 Hard or Soft Guest Checks
14 • Introduction

Up to 5 PLU modifier keys (i.e. small, medium, and large)

18 character programmable descriptors for PLUs and functions

Employee time keeping functions for each clerk with optional employee cards
login/sign on

Four tax rates with value added tax (VAT) capability.

Programmable functionality for each key location

24-hour real-time clock with automatic day and date change

Check, Cash, and up to 8 charge tender functions

Currency conversion capability for up to 4 foreign currencies

Training mode

Food stamp sorting and tendering

Programmable discount/surcharge/coupon keys

Error Correct, Void, Cancel and Void Transaction functions

Function keys for posting charges and payments to accounts or guest checks

Macro, Function Look-up, Price Inquiry, Promo and Waste functions

Management reports, with the capability to view most reports on the register display

Electronic Journal capability

6-line programmable preamble and postamble messages

10-line programmable check endorsement message

Programmable descriptors for financial and clerk reports

Up to 15 PLU look-up keys

Age verification feature forces date of birth entry

Up to 99 Mix & Match discounts
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Display
The SPS-300 features an eight line backlit LCD display.

Press PAGE DOWN in REG mode to increase the intensity of the back light.

Press PAGE UP in REG mode to decrease the intensity of the back light.

The color of the backlight can be changed through system option program settings.
As items are registered, they will be listed on the next available line. The quantity
information will update when multiples of the same item are entered. Additional information
and error messages will display as appropriate, and may be accompanied by an error tone.
Programming options also display. In most cases you can make changes to your program
without consulting this manual by simply following the program menus.
REG
Note: The “CLOSED” message will display if a clerk is not signed on.
REGISTER MODE
██████████
█ CLOSED █
██████████
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Introduction • 15
VOID
Note: The “CLOSED” message will display if a clerk is not signed on.
VOID MODE
██████████
█ CLOSED █
██████████
X (Manager Mode)
MANAGER MODE
0.MANAGER OPERATION
1.X REPORTS
2.DECLARATION
3.REG. PRINT FORMAT
4.STOP RECEIPT PRINTING
5.STOP JOURNAL PRINTING
6.TRAIN MODE
 Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the X MODE menu:
PROGRAM MODE
7.E.J. OPERATION
8.NOT FOUND PLU
9.OPEN CHECK(IRC)

Z (Reset Report Mode)
RESET REPORT MODE
0.Z REPORTS
1.RESET E.J.
2.PC COMMUNICATION
3.MIX & MATCH PROGRAM
4.MIX & MATCH SCAN
5.PLU LOOKUP PROGRAM
6.AGE VERIFICATION
16 • Introduction
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
 Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the Z MODE menu:
RESET REPORT MODE
7.RESET NOT FOUND PLU
9.DATATRAN(DEBIT)
00.DATATRAN

PGM (Program Mode)
PROGRAM MODE

0.PLU
1.GROUP
2.SALES TAX
3.SYSTEM OPTION
4.PRINT OPTION
5.FUNCTION KEYS
6.CLERK
 Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the PROGRAM MODE menu:
PROGRAM MODE
7.LOGO DESCRIPTOR
8.NLU CODE# PROGRAM
9.DOWNLOAD PROGRAMS
00.MORE

 Press 00 to view the MORE PROGRAMS menu:
PROGRAM MODE
0.CLERK I/O
1.PLU STOCK
2.DRAWER LIMIT
3.CHECK CHANGE LIMIT
4.TIME & DATE
5.TARE WEIGHT
6.MACRO
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
P1

Introduction • 17
 Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the PROGRAM MODE page 2
menu:
PROGRAM MODE
7.MACHINE NO.
8.PC SCHEDULE TIME
9.TRAINING MODE P/W
DEC.LEVEL ACTIVATE TIME
00.SCAN
P2

SM (Service Mode)
SERVICE MODE
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

HW TEST
CLEAR ALL TOTALS
CLEAR GRAND TOTAL
CLEAR PLU FILE
FLASHROM INFORMATION
MEMORY ALLOCATION
KEY ASSIGNMENT
 Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the SERVICE MODE menu:
SERVICE MODE
7. IRC OPTIONS
8. RS232C PORT
9. SD CARD OPERATION
00.CLEAR CURR.BATCH
18 • Introduction

SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Printer/Printers
The SPS-320 features a single receipt printer:
Access to SD
Card Slot
SPS-340 and SPS-345 Models feature separate receipt and journal printers:
Access to SD
Card Slot
Printer Specifications
Paper:
2 ¼” (58mm) Thermal Paper
Paper Loading:
Drop-in Loading
Print Speed:
22 Lines per second
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Introduction • 19
Control Lock
The control lock has 7 positions, accessed with 5 keys. Each ECR is shipped with two full
sets of keys.
VOID Use to void (correct) items outside of a sale.
OFF
REG
VOID
X
OFF
The register is inoperable.
REG
Use for normal registrations.
X
Use to read register reports.
Z
Use to read register reports and reset totals to zero.
P
Use to program the register.
S
The S position is a hidden position reserved for
dealer access.
Z
P
S
Before performing any operations in Register Mode a clerk must be signed on. See “Clerk
Sign-On/Sign-Off” for a description of clerk operations.
Control Keys
All SPS-300 series models include two sets of keys that may be used to access the following
control lock positions.
Positions Accessible
Key
REG
OFF, REG
VD
VOID, OFF, REG, X
Z
VOID, OFF, REG, X, Z
P
VOID, OFF, REG, X, Z, P
C
ALL POSITIONS
Note: Keys may be removed from the control lock in the OFF or REG positions.
20 • Introduction
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Keyboards
SPS-320/SPS-340 Flat Keyboard Version
Flat keyboard models have 150 key positions with the default legends and key assignments as
shown below. The keyboard legend sheet can be replaced by lifting the protective rubber
cover.
Shaded key locations are fixed and cannot be changed.
FEED
JOURNAL
FEED
ERROR
CORR
VOID
CLERK
%1
RA
PO
#/NS
RETUR
N
%2
TAKE
OUT
EAT
IN
DRIVE
THRU
TAX 1
%3
CHECK
#
SERVIC
E
TABLE
#
PRINT
CHECK
95
FUNC
LOOKU
P
PAGE
UP
YES/NO
PAGE
DOWN
CONV
1
86
96
FUNC
LOOKU
P
CLEAR
PLU
X/TIME
ADD
CHECK
77
87
97
MACRO
1
7
8
9
CHARGE
1
68
78
88
98
MACRO
2
4
5
6
CHECK
59
69
79
89
99
MACRO
3
1
2
3
SUBTL
60
70
80
90
100
MACRO
4
0
00
.
CASH
1
11
21
31
41
51
61
71
81
91
2
12
22
32
42
52
62
72
82
92
3
13
23
33
43
53
63
73
83
93
4
14
24
34
44
54
64
74
84
94
5
15
25
35
45
55
65
75
85
6
16
26
36
46
56
66
76
7
17
27
37
47
57
67
8
18
28
38
48
58
9
19
29
39
49
10
20
30
40
50
SPS-345 Raised Keyboard Version-Default
The SPS-345 keyboard includes 21 keyboard PLU locations and functions with the default
legends and key assignments as shown below. The keyboard can be expanded to 63 PLU key
locations.
Shaded key locations are fixed and cannot be changed.
1
8
15
2
9
16
3
10
17
4
11
18
5
12
19
6
13
20
7
14
21
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
FEED
JOURNAL
FEED
#/NS
ERROR
CORR
PAGE
UP
YES/NO
PAGE
DOWN
VOID
CLEAR
PLU
X/TIME
TAX 1
7
8
8
CHECK
4
5
5
1
2
2
0
00
.
CLERK
FUNC
LOOKU
P
1
FUNC
LOOKU
P
2
CHARGE
1
SUBTOTAL
CASH
TEND
Introduction • 21
SPS-345 Raised Keyboard Version-Expanded
Your authorized dealer can expand the keyboard to 63 PLU key locations as shown below.
Shaded key locations are fixed and cannot be changed.
1
8
15
22
29
36
43
50
57
2
9
16
23
30
37
44
51
58
3
10
17
24
31
38
45
52
59
4
11
18
25
32
39
46
53
60
5
12
19
26
33
40
47
54
61
6
13
20
27
34
41
48
55
62
7
14
21
28
35
42
49
56
63
FEED
JOURNAL
FEED
#/NS
ERROR
CORR
PAGE
UP
YES/NO
PAGE
DOWN
VOID
CLEAR
PLU
X/TIME
TAX 1
7
8
8
CHECK
4
5
5
1
2
2
CLERK
FUNC
LOOKU
P
1
FUNC
LOOKU
P
2
CHARGE
1
SUBTOTAL
CASH
TEND
0
00
.
SPS-345 Alpha Keyboard Overlay - Expanded
Note: There is no alpha overlay option for the default 21-PLU Location version of the
SPS-300 Series. You must use the descriptor code entry method for programming
descriptors with the 21-key configuration.
FEED
JOURNAL
FEED
CAP
CLEAR
PLU
X/TIME
/
DOUBL
E
7
8
8
;
<
BACK
4
5
5
:
>
1
2
2
A
H
O
V
#
)
"
SPACE
B
I
P
W
$
-
,
SPACE
C
J
Q
X
%
+
.
D
K
R
Y
^
=
E
L
S
Z
&
F
M
T
!
*
SUBTOTAL
CASH
TEND
G
22 • Introduction
N
U
@
(
'
?
0
00
.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
SPS-320/SPS340 Alpha Keyboard Overlay
1
11
21
31
41
51
61
71
81
91
2
12
22
32
42
52
62
72
82
92
FEED
JOURNAL
FEED
'
"
<
>
-
+
=
:
?
!
@
#
$
%
^
&
*
(
)
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
p
a
s
d
f
g
h
j
k
l
;
CLEAR
PLU
X/TIME
z
x
c
v
b
n
m
,
.
/
7
8
9
CAP
DOUBL
E
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
CAP
DOUBL
E
BACK
4
5
6
9
19
29
39
49
59
69
79
89
99
1
2
3
SUBTL
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
0
00
.
CASH
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Introduction • 23
Initial Clear
CAUTION: Do not share this information with unauthorized users. Distribute the
PGM Mode key only to those you may want to perform this function.
The initial clear function allows you to exit any register activity and return to a beginning or
cleared state. Any transaction that is in progress will be exited and totals for that transaction
will not be updated.
Here are some reasons you may want to perform an initial clear:

The register is in an unknown state, and you wish to exit the current program or
transaction without following normal procedures.

You have performed a function that includes a compulsory activity and you wish to
bypass the compulsion.

An initial clear may be necessary as part of servicing, or troubleshooting.
Perform this procedure only as necessary. Contact your SAM4s dealer first if you have
questions about operating or programming your SAM4s SPS-300.
To Perform an Initial Clear:
1. Turn the power switch located on the right side of the register to the OFF position.
2. Turn the control lock to the PGM position.
3. Press and hold the key position where the SUBTOTAL key is located on the default
keyboard layout.
4. While continuing to hold the SUBTOTAL key, turn the power switch to the ON
position. When the “Initial Clear Service” message displays release the SUBTOTAL
key.
5. The message "INITIAL CLEAR OK!” prints when the initial clear is complete. To
resume operations, you will need to sign on a clerk.
SPS-320 and SPS-340
Press and hold the
SUBTL key position
during power-up in
PGM mode.
24 • Introduction
SPS-345
Press and hold the
SUBTOTAL key
position during
power-up in PGM
mode.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Getting Started
Quick Start Steps
SAM4s ECRs are designed to work out-of-the-box. You can sign on a clerk, enter amounts
and finalize a sale. Most functions are active and ready to use.
Use the Quick Start Instructions provided here to prepare your SPS-300 series ECR for
entering a program. Because the SPS-300 features on-screen programming, the dealer or user
can simply follow the menus presented when the key is turned to the PGM (program)
position. Detailed programming steps and reference information is found in the Program
section of this manual.
Steps In this chapter:
1. Unpacking
2. Installing the Paper
3. Clearing All Memory
Unpacking
1. Unpack and unwrap the cash register.
2. Locate in the packing the following items:

Paper roll(s)

1 rewind spindle (SPS-340 and SPS-345)

2 sets of control keys
3. Remove the cardboard protectors from the cash drawer.
4. Plug the register into a grounded outlet (three-prong), turn the power switch on (note the
power switch cover), insert a control key and turn the key to the REG control lock
position.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Getting Started • 25
Installing the Paper
1. Remove the printer cover.
2. Push the blue cap lever and then lift up to open the paper cover.
3. Ensure that the paper is being fed from the bottom of the roll and then close the paper
cover slowly until it locks firmly.
26 • Getting Started
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
4. Pass the leading edge of the paper through the tear-bar slot. Tear off the excess paper.
Replace the printer cover.
Models with Two Printer Stations
The SPS-340 and PS-345 models are equipped with separate printers for receipt and journal.
Paper loading for these models is shown below:
1. Remove the printer cover.
2. Push the green cap lever and then lift up to open the paper cover.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Getting Started • 27
3. Ensure that the paper is being fed from the bottom of the roll and then close the paper
cover slowly until it locks firmly.
4. Pass the leading edge of the paper through the tear-bar slot. Tear off the excess paper.
5. Push the blue cap lever and then lift up to open the journal paper cover.
6. Ensure that the paper is being fed from the bottom of the roll and then close the paper
cover slowly until it locks firmly.
28 • Getting Started
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
7. If you wish to use the printer to print a sales journal, insert the paper into the paper takeup spool. Wind the paper two or three turns around the spool shaft and install the spool in
the mount. Insure that the paper is being fed from the bottom of the roll.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Getting Started • 29
Clearing Memory
Before you use your SPS-300 Series ECR for the first time, you must perform a memory all
clear to insure that all totals and counters are cleared and that the default program is installed.
CAUTION: The procedures described in this area are security sensitive. Clearing the
SPS-300 Series memory after the register is put into service will erase all programming
as well as totals and counters. Do not share this information with unauthorized users
and distribute the key marked “C” only to those you may want to perform these
functions.
PRINTER SELECTION PROCEDURE NOTE: During the Memory All Clear
sequence you will be asked to indicate the printer configuration of the model you are
using, i.e. Single Station printer or 2-Station printer. Printer selection can also be done
as a separate procedure: Power up in S-Mode while holding the 00 key. This procedure
will not clear all memory, but will reset the keyboard to its default key assignments.
SPS-320/SPS-340 Memory All Clear
1. Turn the power switch located on the right side of the register to the OFF position.
2. Turn the control lock to the S position.
3. Press and hold the key position where the CHECK key is located on the default
keyboard layout.
SPS-320 and SPS-340
Press and hold the
CHECK key position
during power-up in S
mode.
4. Continue to hold the appropriate key while turning the power switch to the ON
position. The message “RAM ALL CLEAR" displays.
5. Press the upper left key of the keyboard, then the lower left key, then the upper right
key, and finally press the lower right key.
1
3
SPS-320
SPS-340
2
30 • Getting Started
4
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
6. The display reads: RAM (16M). After a short delay, the message: "OK” will display
if the RAM check is good. Memory is cleared, the default program is installed and
the RAM CLEAR receipt is printed. The display now reads:
2-STATION PRINTER : ‘CASH’ Key
1-STATION PRINTER : ‘CLEAR’ Key
7. If you have an ER-320 (one printer station), press CLEAR.
If you have an ER-340 (two printer stations), press CASH.
8. The display now reads: “
AUTO CUT : ‘CASH’ Key
NO CUT : ‘CLEAR’ Key
Press CLEAR..
9. The SERVICE MODE menu displays. The RAM Clear procedure is complete and
the receipt prints
“ETHERNET LINK FAIL!!!” if the register is not connected to another register in
the network.
The receipt will print the message: “ETHERET LINK SUCCESS!!!” if the register is
connected to another network register.
DATE 07/01/2011 FRI TIME 08:37
================================
RAM ALL CLEAR OK !
================================
RAM (16M) OK
FLASHROM INFORMATION
VERSION :
USA 01.027
CHECKSUM :
A6D8
BOOT/APP :
0806/9ED2
MAY. 10 2012
CLERK 00
000001
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
00000
Getting Started • 31
SPS-345 Memory All Clear
1. Turn the power switch located on the right side of the register to the OFF position.
2. Turn the control lock to the S position.
3. Press and hold the key position where the SUBTOTAL key is located on the default
keyboard layout.
SPS-345
Press and hold the
SUBTOTAL key position
during power-up in S mode.
4. Continue to hold the appropriate key while turning the power switch to the ON
position. The message “RAM ALL CLEAR" displays.
5. Press the upper left key of the keyboard, then the lower left key, then the upper right
key, and finally press the lower right key.
1
3
SPS-345
Default
Configuration
(21 PLU Keys)
2
1
4
3
SPS-345
Expanded
(63 PLU keys)
2
4
Note: In the default configuration, there are 21 double-width PLU keys. Under each
key, the left-most key is inactive and the right-most key is active. The four-key sequence
shown with the default configuration will set the keyboard in the default 21-PLU key
configuration. When the keyboard is expanded, the four-key sequence shown will set
the keyboard in the expanded configuration.
If you wish to build a custom configuration, you will want to perform a memory clear
for the expanded configuration, and then assign each key position individually.
32 • Getting Started
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
6. The display reads: RAM (16M). After a short delay, the message: "OK” will display
if the RAM check is good. Memory is cleared, the default program is installed and
the RAM CLEAR receipt is printed. The display now reads:
2-STATION PRINTER : ‘CASH’ Key
1-STATION PRINTER : ‘CLEAR’ Key
7. Press CASH (the SPS-345 has two printer stations).
8. The display now reads: “
AUTO CUT : ‘CASH’ Key
NO CUT : ‘CLEAR’ Key
Press CLEAR..
9. The SERVICE MODE menu displays. The RAM Clear procedure is complete and
the receipt prints
“ETHERNET LINK FAIL!!!” if the register is not connected to another register in
the network.
The receipt will print the message: “ETHERET LINK SUCCESS!!!” if the register is
connected to another network register.
DATE 07/01/2011 FRI TIME 08:37
================================
RAM ALL CLEAR OK !
================================
RAM (16M) OK
FLASHROM INFORMATION
VERSION :
USA 01.027
CHECKSUM :
A6D8
BOOT/APP :
0806/9ED2
MAY. 10 2012
CLERK 00
000001
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
00000
Getting Started • 33
34 • Getting Started
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations
Operator Display Screen
The SPS-300 Electronic Cash Register has a liquid crystal display screen, providing up to 8
lines of information with up to 32 characters per line. The display is backlit to provide
excellent visibility, regardless of lighting conditions (the color of the backlight can be
changed through system option programming.) Display screen contrast may be adjusted (the
transaction must be finalized):

Press PAGE DOWN in REG mode to increase the intensity of the back light.

Press PAGE UP in REG mode to decrease the intensity of the back light.
The multiple-line screen lets you keep track of each item, as it is registered. For example:

When you are operating the register (in the REG or VOID control lock
positions), you can view a list of items that have been registered, as well as
updated tax and sale subtotals.

If an item is multiplied, or repeated, the display lists the quantity of the item sold.
(Note: Only quantities up to 99 are displayed in the quantity field.)

Up to six items can be displayed simultaneously. When more than six items are
registered, the display lists the last six items sold.

You can scroll through long transactions with the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN
keys. When more than six items have been registered, you can press the PAGE
UP key to view items registered earlier in the sale. Press the PAGE DOWN key
to return to a view of the items registered later in the transaction.

If you make an error, the screen specifies the type of error.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 35
Operator Display Example
Up to six items
can be displayed
simultaneously.
If an item is
multiplied, or
repeated, the
display lists the
quantity of items
here.
Tax and sale
subtotals are
updated with
each new
item entered.
36 • Operations
REGISTER MODE
1 PLU1 T1
1 PLU2
1 PLU3
1 PLU4
3 PLU5
TAX 0.06 SBTL
1 PLU3
1 PLU4
1 PLU5
1 PLU6
1 PLU7
1 PLU8
TAX 0.06 SBTL
1.00
2.00
3.00
4.00
15.00
25.06
3.00
4.00
15.00
6.00
7.00
8.00
46.06
When more than
six items have
been registered,
you can press
the PAGE UP
key to view the
items registered
earlier in the
sale.
When more than
six items are
registered, the
display lists the
last six items
sold.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Clerk Operations
The number of clerks available is determined by memory allocation. (The default
configuration provides 10 clerks.) See "Memory Allocation" in the "Service Mode
Programming" chapter to set the number of clerks as well as other memory variables.
You can choose a push button or code entry clerk system:

The simplest clerk system is the push button system. This is also the default
system; the register will operate this way unless it is programmed otherwise.
You simply press the CLERK key to sign on the clerk. You can operate only
one clerk per register when you choose this method.

You can provide maximum security in a multiple clerk system with the code
entry system. Enter the clerk secret code, and then press the CLERK key to
sign on the register.

You can sign off a clerk by entering 0, then pressing the CLERK key.

Using an optional card reader, you can use employee cards to log on or off.
You can also select stay down or pop-up mode for clerk operation:

Stay down means that once a clerk is signed on, the same clerk will remain
signed on until the clerk signs off. A stay down clerk system might be used
when only one operator uses the register at a time and a different operator
begins when a work shift is changed.

Pop-up means that the clerk is automatically signed off at the end of each
transaction. To begin a transaction, you must first sign a clerk on. A pop-up
clerk system might be used in a department store, where several clerks use
the register during the same shift and clerk sales information is required.
See "System Options" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter to set clerk options.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 37
Clerk Sign On Instructions
When a clerk is not signed on, the message "CLOSED" is shown on the display. Note that
the current clerk must be signed off before a new clerk can be signed on.
Push Button
CLERK #
Code Entry
CLERK #
Secret
clerk #
Clerk Sign Off Instructions
0
38 • Operations
CLERK #
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Clerk Time Keeping
Clerk time keeping is a standard feature of the SPS-300. Clerks can clock in and clock out
regardless of whether they are signed on to operate the register. (Clocking in and clocking
out are separate functions from signing on or signing off to operate the register.) You must
assign secret clerk codes to clock in or clock out. See "System Options" in the "Program
Mode Programming" chapter to set up your clerk system and see "Clerk Programming" to
assign a secret code.
In addition:

A maximum of 10 clock in/out records are kept for each clerk. It is
recommended that users clear time records on a daily basis.

If a clerk forgets to clock in or clock out, or if in or out records need to be
modified, these corrections can be made in the program mode. See "Clerk
In/Out" in the in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter.

Clerk times can be read in the X control lock position or reset in the Z
control lock position. See the "X-Mode" and/or "Z-Mode” chapters.

Using an optional card reader, you can use employee cards to clock in or out.
Note: When a function is located on a function look up menu key, you access the
function by pressing the appropriate function look up key, then pressing the numeric
digit corresponding to the function you wish to select. On the default keyboard, the
TIME IN/OUT function is function #8 on the function look up 1 menu, so to use the
TIME IN/OUT function, you would first press FUNCTION LOOK#1, and then press
the numeric 8 key.
To Clock In/Out:
1. Turn the control lock to the REG position.
2. Any current transaction must be finalized before clocking in or out.
3. Press the TIME IN/OUT key (or, select the TIME IN/OUT function from one of
the function look up keys.)
TIME CLOCK IN/OUT
ENTER SECRET CODE
AND PRESS CASH
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 39
4. Enter the secret code of the clerk that is to clock in, press CASH. The display
will show the 3 most recent in and out records for the clerk, and the total time
worked.
TIME CLERK IN/OUT
I
01/15/2011
O
01/15/2011
I
00/00/0000
O
00/00/0000
I
00/00/0000
O
00/00/0000
TIME WORKED:
08:00
05:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
09:00
5. Repeat the procedure from step 1 to clock out.
6. The printer will print Time In and Time Out records as in the examples below:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
================================
CLERK TIME IN
================================
CLERK 1
IN :
CLERK 1
11/09/2011
No.000011
01
08:33
00001
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
================================
CLERK TIME OUT
================================
CLERK 1
OUT :
CLERK 1
40 • Operations
11/09/2011
No.000011
01
08:33
00001
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Item Registrations
All registrations are accumulated into PLUs. Keyboard PLUs are fixed keys on the keyboard
(like traditional department keys) that access specific PLUs.

Depending upon the specific model and the program installed, there will be
different number of keyboard PLU keys. Flat keyboard models (SPS-320 and
SPS-340) provide 100 PLUs on the default keyboard. The raised key model
(SPS-345) provides 21 PLUs keys in the standard configuration. This can be
expanded by your dealer to 63 PLUs. Your specific program may have a more or
less PLU keys depending upon how key locations are set.

Traditional code-entry PLUs can also be registered by entering the PLU number
and pressing the PLU key.

If optional scanning is implemented, the PLU number corresponds to the UPC
number and a PLU is registered when an item is scanned.
As you make item registrations, you can follow your entries by viewing the display.
Remember that the sale and tax totals are updated automatically with each entry.
Using Function Look-Up Keys
Because the SPS-300 keyboard is programmable, both the selection and location of function
keys may vary from one register to another.
You must pay particular attention to the two function look-up keys, FUNCTION LOOK-UP
#1 and FUNCTION LOOK-UP #2. Each of these keys can contain a list of up to 8
functions that can be used as if they were located on separate keys. For example:

If a function, such as CHARGE1, is located on a function look-up key, as it is on
the default keyboard, then you must access it by pressing the appropriate function
look-up key, then pressing the digit that represents the function, instead of
pressing a key on the keyboard.

If you need to make a numeric entry before a function that is located on a
function look-up key, first press the numeric key or keys, then press the function
look-up key and press the digit that represents the function you wish to select.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 41
Open Keyboard PLU Entry
1. Enter an amount on the ten-key pad. Do
not use the decimal key. For example,
for $2.99, enter:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
2
9
9
2. Press a PLU key. For example, press
PLU 1:
TIME 08:33
PLU1 T1
$2.99
TAX1
$0.18
TOTAL
$3.17
CASH
CLERK 1
$3.17
No.000011
00001
1
Preset Price Keyboard PLU
A preset PLU registers the price that was previously programmed for the PLU. See "PLU
Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter to program preset prices.
1. Press a preset PLU key. For example,
press PLU 5:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
5
PLU5
$1.29
TOTAL
$1.29
CASH
CLERK 1
$1.29
No.000011
00001
Gallonage PLU Entry
1. Enter the total fuel purchase on the tenkey pad. Do not use the decimal key.
For example, for $20.00, enter:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
2
0
0
0
2. Press a PLU key set to gallonage
function. For example, press PLU 7:
TIME 08:33
GAL CNT
#5.26
GAL AMT
@ 3.799
PLU7
$20.00
TOTAL
$20.00
CASH
7
42 • Operations
CLERK 1
$20.00
No.000011
00001
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Keyboard PLU Repeat Entry
Open or preset price PLUs can be repeated as many times as necessary by pressing the same
PLU again. The number of times the item is repeated is shown on the display.
1. Enter an amount on the ten-key pad. Do
not use the decimal key. For example,
for $2.99, enter:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
2
9
9
2. Press a PLU key. For example, press
PLU 1:
TIME 08:33
PLU1 T1
$2.99
PLU1 T1
$2.99
TAX1
$0.36
TOTAL
$6.34
CASH
CLERK 1
1
$6.34
No.000011
00001
3. To register a second item exactly as the
first, press the PLU key a second time.
For example, press PLU 1:
1
Keyboard PLU Multiplication
When several of the same items are to be entered into the same PLU, you can use
multiplication. You can enter a quantity (1 to 999.999) using the X/TIME key. You can
multiply open or preset PLUs.
1. Enter the quantity of items being
purchased; press the X/TIME key. For
example, enter 4 on the numeric key pad
and press the X/TIME key:
4
2. Enter an amount on the ten-key pad. Do
not use the decimal key. For example,
for $1.99, enter:
9
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
4X
X/TIME
1
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
TIME 08:33
@1.99
PLU1 T1
$7.96
TAX1
$0.48
TOTAL
$8.44
CASH
CLERK 1
$8.44
No.000011
00001
9
3. Press a PLU key. For example, press
PLU 1:
1
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 43
Keyboard PLU Multiplication with Decimal Point
If you are selling items by weight, or if you are selling yard goods, you can multiply a
fraction of a unit.
1. Enter the amount with the decimal point;
press the X/TIME key. For example, for
3.75 pounds of produce, enter:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
3
.
7
5
X/TIME
3.75X
2. Enter an amount on the ten-key pad. Do
not use the decimal key. For example, if
the price is $.99 per pound, enter:
@0.99
PLU1 T1
$3.71
TAX1
$0.22
TOTAL
$3.93
CASH
CLERK 1
9
TIME 08:33
$3.93
No.000011
00001
9
3. Press a PLU key. For example, press
PLU 1:
1
Split Pricing (Keyboard PLU)
When items are priced in groups, i.e. 3 for $1.00, you can enter the quantity purchased and let
the register calculate the correct price.
1. Enter the quantity purchased; press the
X/TIME key. For example, enter:
2
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
X/TIME
2. Enter the quantity of the group price;
press the X/TIME key. For example, if
the items are priced 3 for $1.00, enter:
[email protected]
TIME 08:33
@1.00
PLU1 T1
$0.67
TAX1
$0.04
TOTAL
$0.71
CASH
3
CLERK 1
X/TIME
$0.71
No.000011
00001
3. Enter an amount on the ten-key pad. For
example, if the items are priced 3 for
$1.00, enter:
1
0
0
4. Press a PLU key. For example, press
PLU 1:
1
44 • Operations
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Single Item Keyboard PLU
Single item PLUs automatically total as a cash sale immediately after registration. Use single
item PLUs for speedy one item sales. For example if you are selling admission tickets, and
all ticket sales are one item sales, you can use an open or preset PLU. After each registration,
the drawer will immediately open, and a separate transaction receipt is printed. See "PLU
Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter to program a single item PLU.
1. Press a single item preset PLU key (or
enter a price and press a single item open
PLU key.) For example, press PLU 6:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
6
TIME 08:33
PLU6
$1.29
TOTAL
$1.29
CASH
CLERK 1
$1.29
No.000011
00001
Open Code Entry PLU
If the PRESET status of a PLU is set to N (no), the PLU will operate as an open PLU. See
"PLU Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter to program PLU
descriptors and options.
1. Enter the PLU number; press the PLU
key. For example, enter:
2
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
PLU
2. The display will prompt "ENTER
PRICE". Enter an amount on the ten-key
pad. Do not use the decimal key. For
example, for $2.99, enter:
2
9
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
TIME 08:33
PLU2 T1
$2.99
TAX1
$0.18
TOTAL
$3.17
CASH
CLERK 1
$3.17
No.000011
00001
9
3. Press the PLU key again.
PLU
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 45
Preset Price Code Entry PLU
1. Enter the PLU number; press the PLU
key. For example, enter:
1
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
PLU
TIME 08:33
PLU1
$1.29
TOTAL
$1.29
CASH
CLERK 1
$1.29
No.000011
00001
Code Entry PLU Multiplication
When several of the same items are to be entered into the same PLU, you can use
multiplication. You can enter a quantity (1 to 999.999) using the X/TIME key. You can
multiply open or preset PLUs.
1. Enter the quantity of items being
purchased; press the X/TIME key. For
example, enter 4 on the numeric key pad
and press the X/TIME key:
4
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
4X
X/TIME
2. Enter the PLU number; press the PLU
key. For example, enter:
@1.99
PLU1 T1
$7.96
TAX1
$0.48
TOTAL
$8.44
CASH
CLERK 1
1
TIME 08:33
$8.44
No.000011
00001
PLU
Code Entry PLU Multiplication with Decimal Point
If you are selling items by weight, or if you are selling yard goods, you can multiply a
fraction of a unit.
1. Enter the quantity with the decimal point;
press the X/TIME key. For example, for
3.75 pounds of produce, enter:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
3
.
7
5
X/TIME
3.75X
2. Enter the PLU number; press the PLU
key. For example, enter:
TIME 08:33
@2.99
PLU3 T1
$11.21
TAX1
$0.67
TOTAL
$11.88
CASH
3
46 • Operations
PLU
CLERK 1
$11.88
No.000011
00001
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Split Pricing Code Entry PLU
When items are priced in groups, i.e. 3 for $1.00, you can enter the quantity purchased and let
the register calculate the correct price.
1. Enter the quantity purchased, press the
X/TIME key. For example, enter:
2
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
X/TIME
2. Enter the quantity of the group price,
press the X/TIME key. For example, if
the items are priced 3 for $1.00, enter:
[email protected]
TIME 08:33
@2.99
PLU3 T1
$1.99
TAX1
$0.12
TOTAL
$2.11
CASH
3
CLERK 1
X/TIME
$2.11
No.000011
00001
3. Enter the PLU number; press the PLU
key. For example, enter:
3
PLU
PLU Price Inquiry
You can check the price of a PLU without registering the PLU by placing a price inquiry
function key on the keyboard.
1. Press the PRICE INQ key. The message
"PRICEINQ" displays:
Screen Example:
HAMBURGER
1 : 1.25
2 : 1.75
PRICE
INQ
2. Press a preset PLU key, or enter a PLU
number and press the PLU key:
1
0
0
1
PLU
3. The PLU descriptor and price display on
the screen. If the PLU has prices at more
than one price level, all prices will be
shown.
4. Press CLEAR to remove the price
information from the screen, or enter the
PLU again to register the item.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 47
Modifier Key
Pressing a modifier key alters the next PLU registered, either by changing the code number of
the PLU so that a different item is registered, or by just adding the modifier descriptor and
registering the same PLU. See "Modifier 1-5" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter
in order to determine how the modifier key will affect the PLU entry.
Modifiers can be:

stay down so that registrations will be modified by the same modifier until
another modifier is selected,

pop-up after each item to register, for example large, medium or small soft
drink, or

pop-up after each transaction to register the same modification for the item
until the transaction is finalized.
See "System Options" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter to select stay down/popup status.
Pop-Up Modifier Key Affecting PLU Code
1. Press a preset PLU key. For example,
press PLU 1 with a price of $1.00.
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
1
2. Press the MOD 1 key. The message
"MOD1" displays.
MOD
1
PLU1
$1.00
MOD1
#1001
$1.25
PLU2
$1.50
TOTAL
$3.75
CASH
3. Press the same PLU key. In this example
the modifier 1 will add the digit 1 to the
fourth PLU # position, resulting in the
registration of PLU #1001.
CLERK 1
$3.75
No.000011
00001
1
4. Press another PLU key. In this example
press PLU 2 with a price of $1.50.
48 • Operations
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Price Level Key
If you choose to use the price level feature, you must allocate memory for each level. See
"Memory Allocation" in the "Service Mode Programming" chapter. Note that the default
program selects one price level. You must also place price level keys on the keyboard. See
"Function Key Assignment" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter.
If you use this feature, the same PLU can be given up to 5 different preset prices. Price Level
keys shift the price that is being registered. Levels can be:

stay down so that registrations will stay in the selected level until another
level is selected,

pop-up after each item to register, for example large, medium or small soft
drink,

pop-up after each transaction to register the same level until the transaction
is finalized.
See "System Options" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter to set how the price
level keys operate.
Pop-Up Price Level Keys
1. Press a preset PLU key. For example,
press PLU 1 programmed with a price of
$1.00 for price level 1.
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
1
2. Press the LEVEL 2 key. The message
"LEVEL 2" displays.
TIME 08:33
PLU1
$1.00
PLU1
$2.00
PLU2
$1.50
TOTAL
$4.50
CASH
LEVEL
2
CLERK 1
$4.50
No.000011
00001
3. Press the same PLU key. In this example
the PLU 1 key is programmed with a
price of $2.00 for price level 2.
1
4. Press another PLU key. In this example
press PLU 2 programmed to register
PLU #2 with price level 1. Note that the
level 1 price is registered.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 49
Promo
The PROMO key allows you to account for promotional items, as in "buy two, and get one
free". Pressing this key will remove an item's cost from the sale, and the promo item will not be
added to the PLU sales total, but it is added to the item sales counter. If stock (inventory)
reporting is used, the item will be subtracted from inventory.
1. Register an item. For example, press
PLU 1 programmed with a price of $1.00
for price level 1.
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
PLU1
1
2. Press the PROMO key. The message
"PROMO" displays.
$1.00
***PROMO***
PLU1
TOTAL
$0.00
CASH
CLERK 1
PROMO
$0.00
No.000011
00001
3. Enter the item to be promo'd. You can
not enter an item that has not been
already registered in this transaction.
1
Waste
The WASTE key allows control of inventory by accounting for items that must be removed from
stock due to spoilage, breakage or mistakes. Press the WASTE key before entering wasted items,
and then press the WASTE key again to finalize. The WASTE key may be under manager
control, requiring the control lock to be in the X position. The WASTE key is not allowed within
a sale.
1. Press the WASTE key. The message
"WASTE" displays at the top of the
screen.
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
WASTE
TIME 08:33
***WASTE***
2. Enter the item or items that are wasted.
3. Press the WASTE key again to total the
wasted items:
PLU1
$1.25
PLU2
$1.50
***WASTE***
TOTAL
CLERK 1
$2.75
No.000011
00001
WASTE
50 • Operations
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Shifting or Exempting Tax
Shifting Tax
PLUs can be programmed to automatically add the appropriate tax or taxes. Occasionally,
you may need to sell a normally taxable item without tax, or a normally non-taxable item
with tax. You can perform this tax shifting with one of the four tax shift keys.
1. Press the tax shift for the tax you wish to
shift. For example, Press TAX SHIFT
1:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TAX 1
SHIFT
2. Enter an amount on the ten-key pad. Do
not use the decimal key. For example,
for $2.99, enter:
2
9
TIME 08:33
PLU1
$2.99
TOTAL
$2.99
CASH
CLERK 1
$2.99
No.000011
00001
9
3. Press a PLU key. For example, press
PLU 1. If PLU 1 is normally taxable by
tax 1, the registration will be nontaxable.
1
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 51
Exempting Tax
Occasionally, you may need to exempt tax from an entire sale. For example, you might
remove all state and local taxes when you sell merchandise to a church or charitable
institution.
You can exempt tax by using the tax shift keys and the SUBTOTAL key, or you can use the
TAX EXMT (tax exempt) function key.
Exempting Tax with Tax Shift Keys
1. Enter an amount on the ten-key pad. Do
not use the decimal key. For example,
for $2.99, enter:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
2
9
9
2. Press a taxable PLU key. For example,
press PLU 1:
TIME 08:33
PLU1 T1
$2.99
TOTAL
$2.99
CASH
CLERK 1
$2.99
No.000011
00001
1
3. Press SUBTL:
SBTL
4. Press the tax shift key (or keys) that
represents the tax you wish to shift. For
example, to exempt tax 1 press
TAX SHIFT 1, then press SUBTL:
TAX 1
SHIFT
SBTL
5. The display reflects the transaction
without added taxes. Total the sale with
CASH, CHECK, or a CHARGE
function. The sale will not include tax 1.
52 • Operations
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Exempting Tax with the Tax Exempt Key
You can program the TAX EXMT function to remove all or selected taxes.
Note: When a function is located on a function look up menu key, you access the
function by pressing the appropriate function look up key, then pressing the numeric
digit corresponding to the function you wish to select. On the default keyboard, the
TAX EXMT function is function #6 on the function look up 1 menu, so to use the TAX
EXMT function, you would first press FUNCTION LOOK#1, then press the numeric 6
key.
1. Enter an amount on the ten-key-pad. Do
not use the decimal key. For example,
for $2.99, enter:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
2
9
9
2. Press a taxable PLU key. For example,
press PLU 1:
TIME 08:33
PLU1 T1
$2.99
TOTAL
$2.99
CASH
CLERK 1
$2.99
No.000011
00001
1
3. Press SUBTL:
SBTL
4. Press the TAX EXMT key (or access the
TAX EXMT function from a function
look up menu key):
TAX
EXMT
5. The display reflects the transaction
without added taxes. Total the sale with
CASH, CHECK, or a CHARGE
function. The sale will not include tax 1.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 53
Percent Key Operations
A total of five % functions are available. (%1, %2 & %3) are located on the default
keyboard of the SPS-320/340. Your keyboard may be different. More or less % keys may be
located on the keyboard, or they may be located on one of the function look up menu keys.)
Each function is individually programmable to add or subtract, from an individual item or
from a sale total, amounts (coupons) or percentages. You can also program the percentage
key taxable or non-taxable, so that sales taxes are calculated on the net, or the gross amount
of the item or sale. You can also program preset prices or percentages.
The operation examples in this section show the percentage key in a variety of
configurations. See "Function Key Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming"
chapter to assign a specific function to each percentage key.
Preset Percent Discount on an Item
In this example the%1 function is preset with a rate of 10 %.
1. Register the item.
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
2. Press the %1 key:
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
%1
PLU2
3. The discount is automatically subtracted.
$10.00
% 1
-10.000%
AMOUNT
-1.00
TOTAL
$9.00
CASH
CLERK 1
$9.00
No.000011
00001
Enter a Percent Discount on an Item
You can also operate the percentage functions by entering the percentage of the discount or
surcharge. If necessary, you can enter a fractional percentage up two 3 digits beyond the
decimal (i.e. 99.999%).
1. Register the discounted item.
THANK-YOU
2. Enter the percentage. If you are entering
a fraction of a percent, you must use the
decimal key. For example, for one third
off enter:
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
PLU2
$10.00
% 1
3
3
.
3
3
3
-33.333%
AMOUNT
-3.33
TOTAL
$6.67
CASH
3. Press the %1 key:
CLERK 1
$6.67
No.000011
00001
%1
4. The discount is automatically subtracted.
54 • Operations
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Percent on Sale Total
The percent can be an open or preset amount. In this example an open percentage surcharge
of 15% is applied.
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
2. Press the SUBTL key:
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
SBTL
PLU2
3. Enter the percentage, press the
appropriate discount key. For example,
for 15% enter:
$10.00
% 1
15.000%
AMOUNT
$1.50
TOTAL
$11.50
CASH
1
5
CLERK 1
%1
$11.50
No.000011
00001
4. The surcharge is automatically added.
Coupon on Sale (Vendor Coupon)
When programmed as "amount", "sale", "open" and "negative", a % key will perform a
coupon against a sale (or vendor coupon.) Also, depending upon programming:

You may be allowed to enter only one coupon in a sale, after the SUBTL key is
pressed,

You may be allowed to enter multiple coupons, but you must press the SUBTL key
before each coupon entry, or

You may be allowed to enter multiple coupons, without first pressing SUBTL.
In this example, a coupon may be entered only once, and you must first press SUBTL.
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
2. Press the SUBTL key:
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
SUBTL
PLU2
3. Enter the amount of the coupon, press the
appropriate % key. For example:
$10.00
%1
-2.00
TOTAL
$8.00
CASH
2
0
0
%1
CLERK 1
$8.00
No.000011
00001
4. The coupon is subtracted.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 55
Coupon on Item (Store Coupon)
When programmed as "amount", "item", "open" and "negative", a % key will perform a
coupon against an item (or store coupon.) In this case, you must press the PLU (or enter the
PLU number) of the PLU you wish the coupon to be subtracted from.
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. Enter the amount of the coupon, press the
appropriate % key. For example:
2
0
0
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
PLU1
%1
3. Press the PLU key you wish to subtract
the coupon from (or enter the PLU
number of the PLU you wish to subtract
the coupon from and press PLU.)
$10.00
PLU1 C
-2.00
TOTAL
$8.00
CASH
CLERK 1
$8.00
No.000011
00001
1
4. The coupon is automatically subtracted.
56 • Operations
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Return Merchandise Registrations
If you wish to return or refund an item, press MDSE RETURN, then re-enter any item. You
can return merchandise as part of a sale, or you can return merchandise as a separate
transaction and return cash to the customer.
Note: When a function is located on a function look up menu key, you access the
function by pressing the appropriate function look up key, then pressing the numeric
digit corresponding to the function you wish to select. On the default keyboard, the
RETURN function is function #2 on the function look up 1 menu, so to use the
RETURN function you would first press FUNCTION LOOK#1, then press the numeric
2 key.
1. Press RETURN:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
RETURN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
2. Enter the price of the item you wish to
return, then press the PLU key where it
was registered originally.
2
9
9
2
TIME 08:33
RETURN *************************
PLU2 T1
-2.99
TAX1 AMT
-0.18
TOTAL
-3.17
CASH
CLERK 1
-3.17
No.000011
00001
3. Total the sale with CASH, CHECK, or a
CHARGE function.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 57
Voids and Corrections
Error Correction (Void Last Item)
This function corrects the last item entered.
1. Register the item you wish to sell.
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
2. Press the ERROR CORR key:
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
ERROR
CORR
TIME 08:33
PLU1 T1
$2 29
PLU2
$1.29
ERR CORR ----------------------PLU2
-1.29
TAX1 AMT
$0.14
TOTAL
$2.43
CASH
CLERK 1
$2.43
No.000011
00001
Void Previous Item
This function allows you to correct an item registered previously in a transaction.
1. Register an item. Then register a second
item.
2. To correct the first item, press
VOID:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
VOID
TIME 08:33
PLU2
$1.29
PLU1 T1
$2.29
VOID ---------------------------
3. Enter the price of the first item; then
press the PLU key where it was
registered originally.
1
58 • Operations
2
9
PLU2
-1.29
TAX1 AMT
$0.14
TOTAL
$2.43
CASH
CLERK 1
$2.43
No.000011
00001
2
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Cancel
The CANCEL key allows you to stop any transaction. Anything registered within the
transaction before the CANCEL key is pressed is automatically corrected. The CANCEL
key can be inactivated through programming, see "Function Key Programming" in the
"Program Mode Programming" chapter, or the key can be programmed to require manager
control.
Note: When a function is located on a function look up menu key, you access the
function by pressing the appropriate function look up key, then pressing the numeric
digit corresponding to the function you wish to select. On the default keyboard, the
CANCEL function is function #1 on the function look up 1 menu, so to use the CANCEL
function you would first press FUNCTION LOOK#1, then press the numeric 1 key.
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. Press the CANCEL key (or access the
CANCEL function from the function
look up menu.)
CANCEL
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
PLU1 T1
$2.29
PLU2
-0.50
CANCEL *************************
CLERK 1
No.000011
00001
Void Position Operations
You can use the VOID control lock position to correct any complete transaction. To correct
any transaction:
1. Turn the control lock to the VOID
position.
2. Enter the transaction you wish to correct
exactly as it was entered originally in the
REG control lock position. You can
enter discounts, voids, returns, tax
exemptions or any other function.
3. All totals and counters are corrected as if
the original transaction did not take
place.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
VOID MODE **********************
PLU1 T1
-2.29
PLU2
-1.00
TAX1 AMT
-0.14
TOTAL
-3.43
CASH
CLERK 1
-3.43
No.000011
00001
Operations • 59
No Sale Operations
Open Drawer
The #/NO SALE key will open the cash drawer when you have not already started a
transaction. The no sale function can be disabled or placed under manager control through
programming, see "Function Key Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming"
chapter.
1. Press #/NS:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
#/NS
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
2. The drawer will open and the receipt will
print as in the example on the right.
TIME 08:33
NO SALE -----------------------CLERK 1
No.000011
00001
Non Add Number
You can also use the #/NO SALE key to print any number (up to 9 digits) on the printer
paper. You can enter the number any time during a transaction. For example, if you wish to
record a checking account number, enter the number and press the #/NO SALE key before
totaling the sale with the CHECK key.
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. Enter the number you wish to record, for
example enter:
1
2
3
3. Press #/NS:
#/NS
4
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
PLU1 T1
$2.99
NON-ADD#
1234
TAX1 AMT
$0.18
TOTAL
$3.17
CHECK
CLERK 1
$3.17
No.000011
00001
4. Press CHECK:
CHECK
60 • Operations
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Received On Account Operations
You can use one of the received on account functions (RA1-RA3) to accept cash or checks
into the cash drawer when you are not actually selling merchandise. For example, use
received on account to accept payments for previously sold merchandise or record loans to
the cash drawer.
Note: When a function is located on a function look up menu key, you access the
function by pressing the appropriate function look up key, then pressing the numeric
digit corresponding to the function you wish to select. On the default keyboard, the
RA1 function is function #3 on the function look up 1 menu, so to use the RA1 function,
you would first press FUNCTION LOOK#1, then press the numeric 3 key.
1. Press one of the received on account
keys (RA1-RA3) or select one of the
received on account functions from a
function look up menu:
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
RA1
RA
2. Enter the amount of cash received, press
CASH.
1
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
0
0
0
CASH
CASH
$10.00
CHECK
$10.00
CHARGE1
$10.00
RA1
CLERK 1
$30.00
No.000011
00001
3. Enter the check amount received, press
CHECK.
1
0
0
0
CHECK
4. Enter the charge amount received, press
CHARGE1, (or press the FUNCTION
LOOKUP key and press the numeric
key representing the appropriate charge
function.)
1
0
0
0
CHARGE
1
5. You can continue to itemize receipts, or
you can finalize by pressing or selecting
the same received on account key.
RA
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 61
Paid Out Operations
You can use the PAID OUT function to track cash or checks paid out or to record loans from
the cash drawer.
Note: When a function is located on a function look up menu key, you access the
function by pressing the appropriate function look up key, then pressing the numeric
digit corresponding to the function you wish to select. On the default keyboard, the
PO1 function is function #4 on the function look up 1 menu, so to use the PO1 function,
you would first press FUNCTION LOOK#1, then press the numeric 4 key.
1. Press one of the paid out keys (PO1PO3) or select one of the paid out
functions from a function look up menu:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
PO
PO1
2. Enter the amount of cash paid out, press
CASH.
1
TIME 08:33
0
0
0
CASH
-10.00
CHECK
-10.00
PO1
CLERK 1
CASH
-20.00
No.000011
00001
3. Enter the check amount paid out, press
CHECK.
1
0
0
0
CHECK
4. You can continue to itemize paid outs, or
you can finalize by pressing or selecting
the same paid out key.
PO
Subtotaling a Sale
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. Press SUBTL. The subtotal will display
with the message "Sub" indicated on the
rear display.
SUBTL
The subtotal can be printed if the system
option is set. See "Print Option
Programming" in the "Program Mode
Programming" chapter.
62 • Operations
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Eat In/Take Out/Drive Thru Sales
Different types of sales, such as "Eat In", "Take Out" and "Drive Thru" can be categorized by
placing separate keys on the keyboard. EAT IN, TAKE OUT, and DRIVE THRU keys
function as subtotal keys. You can force the operator to press one of the keys before
tendering. See "System Option Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter.
Separate totals will be maintained on the financial report to detail sales counts and amounts
for each key.
Note: EAT IN, TAKE OUT, and DRIVE THRU can be programmed to exempt taxes to
accommodate area where food is taxed differently.
Totaling and Tendering
There are ten tender functions available to categorize sales. CASH and CHECK are
individual keys on the keyboard. The eight charge functions CHARGE 1 - CHARGE 8 are
available on the FUNCTION LOOK#2 key on the default keyboard.
Depending upon how your register is programmed you might find charge keys as individual
function keys on the keyboard, or listed on one of the function look up keys.
Totaling a Cash Sale
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
2. To total a cash sale, press CASH:
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
CASH
3. The display will indicate the total amount
of the cash sale.
PLU2
$7.96
TOTAL
$7.96
CASH
CLERK 1
$7.96
No.000011
00001
Totaling a Check Sale
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
2. To total a cash sale, press CHECK:
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
CHECK
3. The display will indicate the total amount
of the cash sale.
PLU2
$7.96
TOTAL
$7.96
CHECK
CLERK 1
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
$7.96
No.000011
00001
Operations • 63
Tendering a Cash Sale
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. Enter the amount tendered by the
customer. For example, for $20.00 enter:
2
0
0
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
PLU1 T1
0
$2.99
PLU1 T1
4X
3. Press CASH:
$2.99
$1.99
PLU2
$7.96
TAX1
CASH
4. The display will indicate the total amount
of the cash tendered and the change due,
if any.
$0.36
TOTAL
$14.30
CASH
$20.00
CHANGE
CLERK 1
$5.70
No.000011
00001
Tendering a Check Sale
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. Enter the amount tendered by the
customer. For example, for $20.00 enter:
2
0
0
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
PLU1 T1
0
$2.99
PLU1 T1
4X
3. Press CHECK:
$2.99
$1.99
PLU2
CHECK
4. The display will indicate the total amount
of the check tendered and the change
due, if any.
64 • Operations
$7.96
TAX1
$0.36
TOTAL
$14.30
CHECK
$20.00
CHANGE
CLERK 1
$5.70
No.000011
00001
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Totaling a Charge Sale
Use the charge keys to track charge or credit card sales. See "Function Key Programming" in
the "Program Mode Programming" chapter to change the descriptors for the charge tender
functions. For example, you can use CHARGE 1 to track Visa card sales. The descriptor
"VISA" will display on the function look up menu and print on the printer. You can also set
tendering options for the charge keys, i.e. whether to allow over tendering or to enforce
tendering.
Note: When a function is located on a function look up menu key, you access the
function by pressing the appropriate function look up key, then pressing the numeric
digit corresponding to the function you wish to select. On the default keyboard, the
CHARGE 1 function is function #1 on the function look up 2 menu, so to use the
CHARGE 1 function, you would first press FUNCTION LOOK#2, then press the
numeric 1 key.
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. Press one of the charge key if it is located
on the keyboard:
CHARGE
1
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
PLU1 T1
$2.99
PLU1 T1
or, if the charge function is located on a
function look up key press
FUNCTION LOOK2, then press the
digit representing the charge function
you are using:
FUNC
LOOK#2
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
4X
$2.99
$1.99
PLU2
$7.96
TAX1
$0.36
TOTAL
$14.30
CHARGE1
CLERK 1
$14.30
No.000011
00001
1
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 65
Tendering a Charge Sale
Tendering a charge sale may or may not be allowed. See "Function Key Programming" in the
"Program Mode Programming" chapter to set tendering options for the charge keys, i.e.
whether to allow over tendering or to enforce tendering.
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. Enter the amount of the charge and press
one of the charge keys if it is located on
the keyboard:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
PLU1 T1
2
0
0
0
CHARGE
1
$2.99
PLU1 T1
4X
or, if the charge function is located on a
function look up key, enter the amount of
the charge:
$2.99
$1.99
PLU2
$7.96
TAX1
$0.36
TOTAL
$14.30
CHARGE1
$20.00
CHANGE
2
0
0
CLERK 1
0
$5.70
No.000011
00001
Press FUNCTION LOOK2, then press
the digit representing the charge function
you are using:
FUNC
LOOK#2
66 • Operations
1
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Check Cashing
Check cashing means exchanging cash for a check. If you wish to cash checks, you must
place a CHKCASH key on the keyboard. See "Function Key Assignment" in the "Program
Mode Programming" chapter.
1. Enter the amount of the check tendered
by the customer. For example, for
$20.00 enter:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
2
0
0
TIME 08:33
0
***CHKCASH***
2. Press CHKCASH:
CHECK
$20.00
CASH
CHK
CASH
CLERK 1
-20.00
No.000011
00001
3. The display will indicate the amount of
the check and the cash change.
Split Tender
Split tendering is paying for one transaction by more than one payment method. For
example, a $20.00 sale could be split so $10.00 is paid in cash, and the remaining $10.00 is
paid by a check. If necessary, you can make several different payments.
Note: By default, CASH and/or CHECK under tenders are allowed. This can be
changed through function key programming.
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. Enter the amount of cash tendered by the
customer. For example, enter $10.00 and
press CASH:
1
0
0
0
CASH
3. The display will indicate the $10.00 cash
tender and the $10.00 total still due.
4. Enter the amount of check tendered by
the customer. For example, enter $10.00
and press CHECK:
1
0
0
0
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
PLU2
$20 00
TOTAL
$20.00
CASH
$10.00
TOTAL
$10.00
CHECK
CLERK 1
$10.00
No.000011
00001
CHECK
5. When the total tendered equals or
exceeds the total due, the receipt will
print and the transaction is complete.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 67
Post Tender
Post tendering means computing change after the sale has been totaled and the drawer is
open. This feature is useful when a customer changes the amount of the tender or when a
"quick change artist" confuses a clerk. Normally, this function is not allowed. If you wish to
allow post tendering, you must set the appropriate system option. See "System Option
Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter. (A separate system option
determines whether the drawer opens on the post tender.)
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
2. Press CASH:
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
CASH
3. The display will indicate the total of the
cash sale.
4. Enter the amount of the new tender, Press
CASH:
2
0
0
0
PLU1 T1
$2.00
TAX1
$0.12
CASH
CLERK 1
$2.12
No.000011
00001
CASH
5. The display will indicate the change due.
Receipt On/Off and Receipt on Request
When a receipt is not normally issued, you can turn the receipt function off. See "Stop
Register Printing" in the "X-Mode" chapter.
If the receipt is off, you can still issue a receipt after the sale has been completed.
Printing a Receipt after the Sale
 After the sale has been totaled, but before the next transaction is started, press
CASH:
CASH
68 • Operations
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Food Stamp Sales
The SPS-300 is capable of sorting food stamp and non-food stamp eligible items. If a
customer chooses to pay by food stamps, the eligible total can be subtotaled and food stamp
payments accepted. NOTE: The ability to process integrated EBT transactions was added at
firmware version 1.034. Consult with your CRS representative for more information.
If you choose to use this feature, you must:

Locate the appropriate function keys on the keyboard, F/S SHIFT, F/S SUB,
and F/S TEND, and then set the appropriate options for the F/S TEND key.

Determine and set the food stamp status for each PLU item or category.
Refer to the "Service Mode Programming" and the "Program Mode Programming" chapters
to make the appropriate settings.
1. Register the items you wish to sell. You
do not need to sort food stamp eligible or
non-eligible items. The SPS-300 will
maintain a subtotal of eligible items
based upon the pre-programmed status
for each PLU.
If you wish to register a normally food
stamp eligible item into a PLU
programmed as non-food stamp eligible,
press the F/S SHIFT key before
registering the item. In the same manner,
you can register non-food stamp items
into food stamp eligible PLUs.
2. If a customer wishes to pay with food
stamps, press the F/S SUB key to display
the food stamp eligible total:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
PLU1 F
$1.29
PLU2
$4.29
TOTAL
$5.58
F/S TOTAL
$1.29
F/S TEND
$20.00
F/S CRT AMT
$0.71
TOTAL
$3.58
CASH
$5.00
CHANGE
$1.42
F/S/ CHANGE
CLERK 1
$18.00
No.000011
00001
F/S SUB
3. Enter the amount of food stamps
tendered by the customer. For example,
for $20.00 enter:
2
0
0
0
F/S
TEND
4. The remaining amount due displays.
(Note, depending upon programming,
change less than $1 can be applied to the
balance.)
5. Total or tender the remaining balance.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 69
Currency Conversion
If you normally accept currency from neighboring nations, you can program the SPS-300 to
convert the subtotal of a sale to the equivalent cost in the foreign currency. You can set up to
four separate conversion functions for different foreign currencies. To do this, you need to
program the conversion factor. For example, if the US dollar (home currency) is worth
1.3720 Canadian dollars (foreign currency), the conversion factor is 1.3720. See "Function
Key Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter to set a conversion factor.
Note: When a function is located on a function look up menu key, you access the
function by pressing the appropriate function look up key, then pressing the numeric
digit corresponding to the function you wish to select. On the default keyboard, the
CONV1 function is function #7 on the function look up 1 menu, so to use the CONV1
function, you would first press FUNCTION LOOK#1, then press the numeric 7 key.
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. Press the CONV1 key if it is located on
the keyboard:
CONV1
or, if the conversion is located on a
function look up key press FUNCTION
LOOK2, then press the digit
representing the CONV1 function:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
PLU1 T1
$2.00
TAX1
$0.12
TOTAL
¥2.90
CHANGE RATE
@1.3720
HOME AMT.
$10.00
CHANGE
$5.17
No.000011
00001
7
3. The amount due in foreign currency is
displayed.
4. Enter the amount of the foreign currency
tender, Press CASH:
1
$2.12
CONV 1
CLERK 1
FUNC
LOOK#2
TIME 08:33
0
0
0
The currency symbol you
program will display here. See
"Print Option Programming" in
the "Program Mode
Programming" chapter.
CASH
5. The display will indicate the amount of
foreign currency tendered and display
$5.17 change due. The change due is
computed in home currency!
70 • Operations
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Check Tracking Operations
Important Note: Check tracking operations must take place on the same register. If an
IRC register system is implemented, you cannot access the same checks from any
register within the system. You must open, add to, and/or pay the check at the same
register.
Overview
The SPS-300 can employ a manual previous balance, hard check, or soft check system. (You
must select hard or soft check posting in memory allocation programming - the default
selection is soft.)

If manual previous balance is selected, the check balance is not saved in memory
and is input manually by the operator (use the PBAL key).

If a hard check system is selected, only the previous balance is maintained in
memory.

If a soft check system is selected, the check detail is kept in memory until the
check is paid. (The maximum size of the soft check is set in memory allocation
programming.)
Options
For hard or soft check operations, the following tracking options are available:

Tracking by manually entering the check number. (The number of digits in the
check number may be set from 0-9, with zero meaning no fixed length.)

Tracking by automatically assigning a check number. The starting check is
always #1.

Enforcing entry of a table number, where a check number is also assigned, allows
the check balance to be recalled by either the check or table number. Multiple
checks may be assigned at the same table. (If there are multiple checks assigned
to the same table, an attempt to recall by table number will recall the check with
the lowest number.)

The check number can be scanned from a printed bar code. For example, a bar
code can be printed on a customer identification badge.
For soft check operations, the following option is available:

Consolidation of like items can be selected for guest check printing. For
example, if three rounds of drinks are served, the check will print "3 TAP
BEER" rather than "1 TAP BEER" three times.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 71
Function Keys
Although none of the functions necessary for check tracking operations appear on the default
keyboard, any or all of the following functions can be located on the keyboard:
CHECK #
The CHECK # key is used to begin a new, or access an existing
balance (hard check) or itemized bill (soft check.)
Check track numbers that are entered manually may be set at a fixed
length of one to nine digits. Check track numbers assigned
automatically will begin with #1.
Existing checks are accessed by entering the check track number and
pressing the CHECK# key. In a drive thru system, simply pressing
the PBAL key will recall the oldest open balance (lowest check track
#).
GUEST
Use to enter the count of guests served as part of a guest check. The
entry of a guest count can be enforced when opening a guest check, or
for all transactions.
P/BAL
Use to enter the amount of an outstanding balance. The P/BAL key
will take the recall function if the drive thru feature is enabled in
CHECK # key programming.
SERVICE
Use to temporarily finalize Previous Balance or check tracking
transactions. (If you are using a hard check system, you must program
the SERVICE key for the port where the slip printer is connected.)
TABLE
You can enforce the entry of a table number for guest check
transactions, or for all transactions. If you are tracking guest check
balances, the balance can be recalled either by entering the check
number or the table number.
PRINT CHECK
Use to print a guest check. The check can be printed on an optional
(RS-232C) printer, or can be printed on the receipt printer. The PRINT
CHECK key can be set to automatically service the check.
TIP
The TIP key allows a gratuity to be added to a guest check before
payment.
The TIP key may be programmed as either a percentage or amount.
If programmed as a percentage, tax programming defines whether
the percentage is calculated on the net (taxable = no) amount, or the
amount after taxes.
See "Function Key Assignment" in the "Service Mode Programming" chapter to place the
functions necessary for your application. See "Function Key Programming" in the "Program
Mode Programming" chapter to set the options for each function.
72 • Operations
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Posting Balances Manually
Opening a Check
1. Enter the previous balance (if this is the
first posting, enter 0) press the PBAL
key:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
0
PBAL
2. Register the items you wish to sell.
3. To total the posting, press SERVICE:
TIME 08:33
PBAL
$0.00
PLU2
$1.00
SERVICE
$1.00
BFWD
CLERK 1
$1.00
No.000011
00001
SERVICE
4. Place a slip in an optional slip printer,
press the PRINT CHECK key.
Adding to a Check
1. Enter the previous balance, press the
PBAL key:
1
0
0
PBAL
2. Register the next items you wish to sell.
3. To total the posting, press SERVICE:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
PBAL
$1.00
PLU3
$2.00
SERVICE
$2.00
BFWD
SERVICE
CLERK 1
$3.00
No.000012
00001
4. Place a slip in an optional slip printer,
press the PRINT CHECK key.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 73
Paying a Manual Balance
1. Enter the previous balance, press the
PBAL key:
3
0
0
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
PBAL
2. If necessary, add additional items. If you
wish to add a tip, press SUBTL, then
enter the tip amount and press the TIP
key:
TIME 08:33
PBAL
$3.00
TIP
$0.50
CHECKS PAID
$3.50
CASH
$10.00
CHANGE
CLERK 1
$6.50
No.000013
00001
SBTL
5
0
TIP
3. Pay the balance as you would normally
tender a transaction, with CASH,
CHECK, or one of the CHARGE
functions. If the tender is greater than
the balance due, change is displayed:
1
0
0
0
CASH
4. Place a slip in an optional slip printer,
press the PRINT CHECK key.
74 • Operations
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Soft Check
Opening a Soft Check
1. Enter the number of the guest check,
press the CHECK # key:
Receipt Example:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
1
2
3
CHECK#
or, press the CHECK # key to
automatically assign a check:
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
#123
CHECK #
PBAL
$0.00
TABLE
#3
GUEST
CHECK#
#2
CHICKEN
$7.00
STEAK
2. If required, enter the table number and
press the TABLE key:
SERVICE
BFWD
CLERK 1
3
$10.00
$17.00
$17.00
No.000011
00001
TABLE
3. If required, enter the number of guests
and press the GUEST key:
2
GUEST
4. Register the items you wish to sell.
5. To total the posting, press SERVICE:
SERVICE
Note: If a table number entry is required for all guest checks, and checks are assigned
by register, the check will be assigned by the register when the table # is entered.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 75
Adding to a Soft Check
Receipt Example:
1. Enter the number of the guest check,
press the CHECK # key:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
1
2
3
CHECK#
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
or, if you entered a table number, enter
the table number and press the TABLE
key:
3
#123
CHECK #
PBAL
$17.00
TABLE
#3
GARLIC BREAD
$2.00
SERVICE
BFWD
TABLE
TIME 08:33
$2.00
$19.00
CLERK 1
No.000012
00001
2. Register the next items you wish to sell.
3. To total the posting, press SERVICE:
SERVICE
Printing a Soft Check
Sample of soft check printed on the
receipt:
1. Enter the number of the guest check,
press the CHECK # key:
1
2
3
THANK-YOU
CHECK#
CALL AGAIN
or, if you entered a table number, enter
the table number and press the TABLE
key:
3
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
#123
CHECK #
PBAL
$19.00
TABLE
TABLE
#3
CHICKEN
2. Press PRINT CHECK to print the
complete check. If programmed to do so,
the PRINT CHECK key will
automatically service the check:
STEAK
76 • Operations
$10.00
GARLIC BREAD
SERVICE
BFWD
$2.00
$0.00
$19.00
CHK # : 1
CLERK 1
PRINT
CHECK
$7.00
No.000012
00001
The number of
times each check
has been printed
is counted and
printed on the
check
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Paying a Soft Check
1. Enter the number of the guest check,
press the CHECK # key:
Sample of soft check printed on the
receipt:
THANK-YOU
1
2
3
CALL AGAIN
CHECK#
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
or, if you entered a table number, enter
the table number and press the TABLE
key:
TIME 08:33
#123
CHECK #
PBAL
$19.00
TABLE
#3
TIP
3
TABLE
2. If necessary, add additional items. If you
wish to add a tip, press SUBTL, then
enter the tip amount and press the TIP
key:
$3.00
CHECKS PAID
$22.00
CASH
$25.00
CHANGE
$3.00
CHK # : 2
CLERK 1
No.000013
00001
SBTL
3
0
0
TIP
3. Pay the balance as you would normally
tender a transaction, with CASH,
CHECK, or one of the CHARGE
functions. If the tender is greater than
the balance due, change is displayed.
2
5
0
0
CASH
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 77
Hard Check
Opening a Hard Check
1. Enter the number of the guest check,
press the CHECK # key:
Receipt Example:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
1
2
3
CHECK#
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
#123
CHECK #
PBAL
or, press the CHECK # key to
automatically assign a check:
$0.00
TABLE
#3
GUEST
CHECK#
2. If required, enter the table number and
press the TABLE key:
$7.00
STEAK
SERVICE
BFWD
CLERK 1
3
#2
CHICKEN
$10.00
$17.00
$17.00
No.000011
00001
TABLE
3. If required, enter the number of guests
and press the GUEST key:
2
GUEST
4. Register the items you wish to sell.
5. Place a slip in an optional slip printer, the
check will print automatically when you
press SERVICE:
SERVICE
78 • Operations
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Adding to a Hard Check
1. Enter the number of the guest check,
press the CHECK # key:
Receipt Example:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
1
2
3
CHECK#
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
or, if you entered a table number, enter
the table number and press the TABLE
key:
3
TIME 08:33
#123
CHECK #
PBAL
$17.00
TABLE
#3
GARLIC BREAD
$2.00
SERVICE
BFWD
TABLE
CLERK 1
$2.00
$19.00
No.000012
00001
2. Register the next items you wish to sell.
3. To total the posting, press SERVICE:
SERVICE
Paying a Hard Check
1. Enter the number of the guest check,
press the CHECK # key:
Sample of Hard Check postings printed on an
optional printer:
DATE
1
2
3
CHECK#
TABLE
$0.00
STEAK T1
$15.50
LOBSTER T1
$19.50
WINE T1
$2.50
WINE T1
$2.50
TAX1
$3.60
SERVICE
2. If necessary, add additional items. If you
wish to add a tip, press SUBTL, then
enter the tip amount and press the TIP
key:
$43.60
43.60
BFWD
No.000017 REG 01 KELLY
PBAL
2X
$43.60
WINE T1
$5.00
TAX1
$4.05
$5.45
49.05
BFWD
No.000019 REG 01 KELLY
3
0
0
PBAL
TIP
2X
3. Pay the balance as you would normally
tender a transaction, with CASH,
CHECK, or one of the CHARGE
functions. If the tender is greater than
the balance due, change is displayed.
5
0
0
TIME 09:47
$49.05
@2.50
WINE T1
TAX1
$5.00
$4.50
CHECKS PAID
$54.50
TOTAL
$54.50
CASH
$54.50
No.000021 REG 01 KELLY
2
TIME 09:15
@2.50
SERVICE
SBTL
WED
#4
PBAL
or, if you entered a table number, enter
the table number and press the TABLE
key:
3
12/01/2011
CHECK #
TIME 10:16
CASH
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 79
Fast Food Drive Thru
For fast food drive thru windows, the SPS-300 has the capability of storing orders when they
are taken, and then recalling the next order automatically at the payment window. (Note:
Drive thru storing & recalling must be done at the same register.)

The PBAL function becomes a recall function when the drive thru feature is
enabled in the CHECK # function key program. Press the PBAL key to recall
the lowest tracking number balance.

Orders are stored by first pressing the CHECK # key to automatically assign the
next tracking number, then pressing SERVICE. (A macro sequence key could
be created to execute both functions sequentially by pressing the MACRO key.)
See "Function Key Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter.
Taking a Drive Thru Order
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
Receipt Example:
THANK-YOU
2. Press the CHECK # key to begin an
automatically assigned check:
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
CHECK#
3. To store the posting, press SERVICE:
SERVICE
HAMBURGER
$2.00
FRIES
CHECK #
PBAL
$1.00
#3
$0.00
SERVICE
BFWD
$3.00
$3.00
CLERK 1
No.000011
00001
Paying a Drive Thru Order
Receipt Example:
1. Press the PBAL key:
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
PBAL
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
2. If necessary, add additional items,
register discounts or coupons.
3. Pay the balance as you would normally
tender a transaction, with CASH,
CHECK, or one of the CHARGE
functions. If the tender is greater than
the balance due, change is displayed.
5
80 • Operations
0
0
TIME 08:33
#3
CHECK #
PBAL
$3.00
CHECKS PAID
$3.00
TOTAL
$3.00
CASH
$5.00
CHANGE
CLERK 1
$2.00
No.000012
00001
CASH
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Charge Posting Operations
The SPS-300 Series check tracking system can be used to post charges and payments to house
accounts. This posting system is ideal for small resorts, camgrounds, motels/hotels or retail
stores that accept house charges.
Charge posting features include:

Manual balance posting, soft check posting, or hard check posting. For house
account posting, the hard check posting method with an optional slip printer is
recommended. (Because house accounts are usually maintained over a period of
time, the soft check system may not have the memory capacity to track the ongoing
account activity.)

Payments can be posted before charges are posted and credit balances can be carried
forward.

Overpayments can be issued as change or carried forward.

Managers can control access to new account numbers or closing accounts.

Zero balance accounts can remain active.

The total of outstanding accounts prints at the end of the open check report and also
on the Financial report. (The total is not reset when the financial report is cleared.)

The total of house account charges (Service Total) and payments are reported to
facilitate accounts receivable balancing.
In order to implement this system, you must enable the charge posting features. The flag to
enable charge posting is located in the function key options for the FINALIZE key. See
“FINALIZE” on page 201.) You must also assign the necessary function keys for your
application.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 81
Charge Posting Function Keys
82 • Operations
CHECK #
(ACCT #)
The CHECK # key is used to begin a new, or access an existing
balance (hard check) or itemized bill (soft check.) Existing checks
are accessed by entering the check track number and pressing the
CHECK# key. You may wish to reprogram the descriptor of the
CHECK # key to ACCT#.
P/BAL
Use to manually enter the amount of an outstanding balance. The
P/BAL key is not used when hard or soft check posting is used.
SERVICE
(HOUSE CHRG)
Use to temporarily finalize Previous Balance or house account
transactions. (If you are using a hard check system, you must program
the SERVICE key for the port where the slip printer is connected.)
You may wish to reprogram the descriptor of the SERVICE key to
HOUSE CHRG.
PAYMENT
Press to make a payment, partial payment, or pre-payment while
posting to a check (account). If the payment amount exceeds the check
balance, the screen will display the option to apply the change to the
account or to issue the overpayment as change.
PRINT CHECK
Use to print a check. The check can be printed on an optional (RS232C) printer, or can be printed on the receipt printer. The PRINT
CHECK key can be set to automatically service the check.
FINALIZE
Pressing the FINALIZE key before closing a check will close the
account and the account number will no longer be reported on the open
check report.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Sample of Hard Check postings printed on an optional
printer:
Opening an Account
1. Enter the number of the account and press
the CHECK # key. You may be required
to turn the key lock to the MGR position.
DATE
12/01/2012
1
2
3
PBAL
CHECK#
Accepting an Advance Payment
$0.00
PAYMENT
$50.00
CHECK
$50.00
SERVICE
2. Press the PAYMENT key.
$0.00
-50.00
BFWD
No.000017 REG 01 ETHAN
PAYMENT
DATE
3. Enter the amount of the payment and
press the appropriate tender key; cash,
check or charge.
5
0
0
0
CHECK
4. Press the SERVICE key to finalize and
store the balance.
SERVICE
Posting New Charges
WED
#123
CHECK #
TIME 09:15
12/01/2012
WED
PBAL
$50.00
ROOM
$75.00
SERVICE
$75.00
25.00
BFWD
No.000019 REG 01 ETHAN
DATE
TIME 09:47
12/01/2012
PBAL
WED
$25.00
CHANGE
$5.00
TENDER
$30.00
CASH
$25.00
SERVICE
BFWD
No.000021 REG 01 ETHAN
$0.00
$0.00
TIME 10:16
5. Enter the number of the account and press
the CHECK # key.
6. Enter items purchased.
7. Press the SERVICE key to finalize and
store the balance.
Accepting an Overpayment and
Issuing Change
8. Enter the number of the account and press
the CHECK # key.
9. Press the PAYMENT key.
10. Enter the amount of the payment and
press the appropriate tender key; cash,
check or charge.
11. If the payment exceeds the balance, the
display will read: “0:APPLY TO
ACCOUNT BALANCE, 1:RETURN AS
CHANGE. Press “1”. After completing
the payment, the cash drawer opens.
12. Close the cash drawer and press the
SERVICE key to finalize and store the
balance.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 83
Scale Operations
The SPS-300 can be interfaced to an optional load-cell scale. The scale interface allows
direct entry of an item's weight using the SCALE function. You can also choose "manual
entry" scale operation if you are working with a standalone scale that is not interfaced to the
cash register.

PLUs must be set to "scaleable" status to allow scale multiplication. If you
attempt an entry into a PLU that has been programmed "scaleable", an error tone
will sound and the message “REQ. SCALE ENTRY” will display.

PLUs can be set to "auto scale" status to speed up scale entries by automatically
retrieving the weight on the scale and multiplying it times the amount entered.
A tare is the amount of weight accounted for by the container or packaging. By entering a
tare weight (as required by law in some areas) the weight of the container is subtracted and
only the true weight of the product is measured on the scale. By entering the tare number (15) the operator can automatically subtract the predetermined container weight when a product
is on the scale.

PLUs can be set to "auto tare" status to automatically subtract one of the
preprogrammed tare weights when the PLU is registered.
Refer to the "Service Mode Programming" and "Program Mode Programming" chapters to set
your scale options. See:
84 • Operations

"Function Key Assignment" to place SCALE and TARE keys on the keyboard.

"RS232C Port Options" to attach a scale to one of the ports.

"Function Key Programming" to set options for the SCALE and TARE keys.

"PLU Programming" to set scaleable, auto scale, or auto tare status.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Direct Scale Entry
Place a product on the scale and access the SCALE function to display the weight on the cash
register. Then make the appropriate entry; the PLU must have "scaleable" status.
1. Place an item on the scale.
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
2. Press the SCALE key.
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
TIME 08:33
SCALE
1.50 lb
3. Note that the weight is displayed on the
screen. Enter the price per pound on the
ten-key pad. Do not use the decimal key.
For example, for $3.00, enter:
3
0
@3.00/lb
PLU1
$4.50
TAX1
$0.27
TOTAL
$4.77
CASH
CLERK 1
$4.77
No.000011
00001
0
4. Press a PLU key. For example, press
PLU 1:
1
Automatic Scale Entry
Place a product on the scale and make the appropriate PLU entry. The PLU must be set with
"auto scale status".
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
1. Place an item on the scale.
2. Press a PLU key, if the item is a preset
item, or enter the price per pound on the
ten-key pad. Do not use the decimal key.
For example, for $3.00, enter:
3
0
0
3. Press a PLU key. For example, press
PLU 1:
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
1.50 lb
PLU1
TAX1
TOTAL
CASH
CLERK 1
TIME 08:33
@3.00/lb
No.000011
$4.50
$0.27
$4.77
$4.77
00001
1
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 85
Tare Weight Entry
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
1. Place an item on the scale.
2. Enter the preprogrammed tare number.
Press the TARE key.
1
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
1.50 lb
PLU1
TAX1
TOTAL
CASH
CLERK 1
TARE
3. Press the SCALE key.
TIME 08:33
@3.00/lb
No.000011
$4.50
$0.27
$4.77
$4.77
00001
SCALE
4. Note that the weight, less the tare weight,
is displayed on the screen. Enter the
price per pound on the ten-key pad. Do
not use the decimal key. For example,
for $3.00, enter:
3
0
0
5. Press a PLU key. For example, press
PLU 1:
1
86 • Operations
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Manual Tare Weight Entry
1. Place an item on the scale.
2. Enter the manual tare number, 5. Press
the TARE key:
5
3. Enter the tare weight (using the decimal
key- you can enter weights up to 2-digits
before and 3-digits after the decimal i.e.
xx.xxx), for example, enter .01, press the
tare key:
0
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
1.50 lb
TARE
.
THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
1
TIME 08:33
@3.00/lb
PLU1
$4.50
TAX1
$0.27
TOTAL
$4.77
CASH
CLERK 1
$4.77
No.000011
00001
TARE
4. Press the SCALE key.
SCALE
5. Note that the weight, less the tare weight,
is displayed on the screen. Enter the
price per pound on the ten-key pad. Do
not use the decimal key. For example,
for $3.00, enter:
3
0
0
6. Press a PLU key. For example, press
PLU 1:
1
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 87
Manual Weight Entry
Note: Manual weight entry is allowed only when a scale is not connected and the RS-232C
port is not set to the scale function. Manual Weight is also used when voiding or returning a
scale item without using the scale.
Operators can make manual weight entries if the item has been programmed to accept them.
You must use the decimal key to enter fractional manual weights.
1. Place an item on the scale.
THANK-YOU
2. Enter the weight using the decimal key
for fractional weights. Press the SCALE
key:
CALL AGAIN
DATE 06/05/2011 SUN
1.50 lb
1
.
5
SCALE
3. Enter the price per pound on the ten-key
pad. Do not use the decimal key. For
example, for $3.00, enter:
3
0
TIME 08:33
MANUAL WT. @ @3.00
PLU1
$4.50
TAX1
$0.27
TOTAL
$4.77
CASH
CLERK 1
$4.77
No.000011
00001
0
4. Press a PLU key. For example, press
PLU 1:
1
Quick Journal Review
This feature was designed for use with the SPS-320, where a separate journal printer is not
provided. It allows the operator to quickly print out the details of the last transaction or
transactions for review. Quick Journal Review is available if set in Print Option
Programming (see Print Option page 16.)
In the REG key lock position (outside of a transaction) enter 1 0 and press the SUBTL key.
Recent journal entries are printed. (The last XX lines of the electronic journal are printed,
where XX is set in Print Option programming.)
Integrated Payment Operations
See “Integrated Payment Appendix” on page 263 for electronic payment operation
information.
88 • Operations
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Not Found PLU
Note: The System Option “DISABLE NOT FOUND PLU” must be set to N(o) to allow
this function.
The “Not Found PLU” feature is available for use when an optional scanner is used to input
PLUs. If an item is scanned that is not programmed in the PLU file, the operator has the
option to input the price of the item and assign it the same descriptor and properties of
another PLU, or enter the descriptor and tax status independently. This provides a simple
mechanism for quickly building an item file for a simple scanning installation.
Quick Entry Method
1. Scan an item or input a PLU number. If the item is in the PLU file, it will
register, if an item is not in the PLU file, the NOT FOUND PLU screen will
display:
NOT FOUND PLU PROGRAM ?
0 : NO
1 : YES
2. Press the numeric “1” key to allow the registration of the PLU. The cursor will
point at the SELECT COPY PLU field.
NOT FOUND PLU PROGRAM ?
SELECT COPY PLU
PRICE:
0
0
3. Press a PLU on the keyboard, or enter a PLU number and press the PLU key.
The cursor will advance to the price field.
Note: The not found PLU will assume the same attributes of the PLU selected
here. For example, if the item scanned is a “liquor” item, then press another
PLU in the liquor category, or if you are using a PLU designated to accept open
liquor entries, that PLU must be set to be a preset PLU with a preset value of
zero and preset override allowed. (If you copy the PLU to an open PLU, the not
found PLU will also be an open PLU.).
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 89
4. Enter the PLU price and press CASH. The PLU will register using the descriptor
and tax status of the copied PLU.
Detail Entry Method
1. Scan an item or input a PLU number. If the item is in the PLU file, it will
register, if an item is not in the PLU file, the NOT FOUND PLU screen will
display:
NOT FOUND PLU PROGRAM ?
0 : NO
1 : YES
2. Press the numeric “1” key to allow the registration of the PLU. The cursor will
point at the SELECT COPY PLU field.
NOT FOUND PLU PROGRAM ?
SELECT COPY PLU
0
0
PRICE:
3. Enter “0” and press the PLU key. The cursor will advance to the price field and
additional fields will display to allow entry of a unique descriptor and PLU tax
status.
NOT FOUND PLU PROGRAM ?
SELECT COPY PLU
PRICE:
DESC :
TAX :
0
0
1N 2N 3N 4N
4. Enter the PLU price and press CASH. The cursor will advance to the descriptor
field.
90 • Operations
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
5. Enter a descriptor using the descriptor method set up on your register (keyboard
overlay or descriptor code. See “Descriptor Programming Methods” on page
137.) After the descriptor entry, press CASH. The cursor will advance to the
TAX (1) field.
6. Press the YES/NO key to toggle the tax status from N(o) to Y(es). Set the status
for the four possible tax rates and press CASH. The PLU entry is completed.
Not Found PLU Report
Managers will typically use the “Not Found PLU Report” as a tool to update the PLU file. A
list of up to 50 not found PLU items can be retained in the report. When capacity is reached,
you must clear (Z) the Not Found PLU report.
 To run an X Report of not found PLUs, choose NOT FOUND PLU (selection #8)
from the Manager Mode menu
 To run an Z Report of not found PLUs, choose RESET NOT FOUND PLU
(selection #7) from the R Mode menu.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Operations • 91
92 • Operations
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Management Functions
Introduction
All Management Functions take place with the control lock in the X position. In this way
only those with the correct key will have access to these functions. Some register operations
may be programmed to require the control lock in the X position in order to operate. All
reports require a key that will access the X or Z position.
Manager Mode
 Turn the control lock to the X position to display the MANAGER MODE menu:
MANAGER MODE
0.MANAGER OPERATION
1.X REPORTS
2.DECLARATION
3.REG. PRINT FORMAT
4.STOP RECEIPT PRINTING
5.STOP JOURNAL PRINTING
6.TRAIN MODE

 Press PAGE DOWN to display the second page of MANAGER MODE options:
MANAGER MODE
7.E.J. OPERATION
8.NOT FOUND PLU
9.OPEN CHECK(IRC)
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20

Management Functions • 93
Manager Operation
Choose Manager Operation to access the Manager Mode screen, where operations allowed
only with manager control can be performed.
1. From the MANAGER MODE menu press 0 to enter manager mode:
MANAGER MODE
2. The MANAGER MODE screen displays.
3. Complete the operation requiring manager control.
X Reports
X reports read, but do not reset, totals and counters within a report.
1. From the MANAGER MODE menu press 1 to select X Reports:
MANAGER MODE
* ENTER REPORT# TO ISSUE
X REPORT
* PRESS CASH TO VIEW REPORT LIST
* PRESS CLEAR TO RETURN
TO MANAGER MODE MENU
94 • Management Functions
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
2. If you know the number of the report you wish to generate, enter the number and
press CASH. If you wish to look up the report number, press CASH to view the
X Report List, then press the number of the report you wish to generate.
X REPORT LIST
0.FINANCIAL
1.TIME
2.PLU
3.CLERK
4.GROUPS
5.DAY
6.STOCK
P1 
Press PAGE DOWN to view the second page of reports:
X REPORT LIST
7.CLERK TIME
8.OPEN CHECK
9.DRAWER TOTALS
00.PLU ZERO SALE
DEC. MIX & MATCH
P2 
3. When a report is selected, the X REPORT OPTIONS screen displays:
X REPORT OPTIONS
RPT# :
FINANCIAL
1. TYPE
0
0:DAILY 1:PERIOD
2. 0:PRINT 1:DISPLAY
0
3. IRC
0
0:STANDALONE
1:ALL 2:SELECT
4. Select the TYPE (DAILY or PERIOD), PRINT or DISPLAY, and the IRC
configuration. Refer to the explanations in the table below. Press CASH after
each selection. After the last selection, the report will start.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Management Functions • 95
5. If IRC is SELECT, then the register selection displays:
X REPORT OPTIONS
RPT# :
FINANCIAL
1. TYPE
0
0:DAILY 1:PERIOD
2. 0:PRINT 1:DISPLAY
0
3. IRC
2
0:STANDALONE
# 1Y  2N 3N 4N 5N 6N 7N 8N
6. Press the YES/NO key at each register # to select whether you wish to include
each register in the consolidated report. Press CASH after each selection. After
the last selection, the report will start.
Field
Description
TYPE
Select X1 or X2 if available for the selected report.
IRC
Select STANDALONE, ALL, or SELECT if available
for the selected report. If SELECT, the screen will
prompt for selection of registers - the screen will
initially show the registers available from the from/to
IRC register programming, for example if the IRC
range is from 1 to 3, then the selection will default to:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Y Y Y N N N N N
OUTPUT
96 • Management Functions
Select PRINT or DISPLAY output.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Declaration
Cash declaration is the process of counting and reporting media in drawer before a report is
taken. "Enforce cash declaration" is an option that requires to the operator to declare
amounts of media in the drawer before a financial, clerk, or cash in drawer report can be
generated. The purpose of this feature is to insure accurate reporting, even in case of an
overage. You can enforce declaration by setting the appropriate system option. See "System
Option Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter.
1. From the MANAGER MODE menu press 2 to display the DELCARATION
SCREEN. The cash drawer opens.
DECLARATION SCREEN
CASH
CHECK
CHARGE1
F/S TEND
TOTAL
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
2. At the DECLARATION SCREEN, enter cash amounts, press the CASH key.
Enter checks individually, or enter a check total, press the CHECK key. Enter
Food Stamps, press the F/S TEND key. You can make as many entries as you
wish, the screen will keep running totals. You may wish to use the X/TIME key
to multiply. For example if you are declaring 37 quarters, you can enter 37, press
X/TIME, enter 25, and then press CASH. The result is added to the cash
declared running total on the screen.
3. When you have completed declaration entries, press the CASH key again to
finalize and total your declaration. The screen will display the total declared
input, the drawer total and the difference (over/short).
DELCARATION SCREEN
INPUT AMT
DRAWER TTL
31.00
17.00
DIFFERENCE
-14.00
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Management Functions • 97
Register Print Format
You can designate the SPS-320 printer to print either a receipt, or a sales journal. If you
select journal format, the preamble/postamble will not print. If you select receipt format, the
preamble/postamble will print and the receipt will feed sufficiently for paper tear-off.
1. From the MANAGER MODE menu press 3 to set the receipt format:
REG. PRINTING FORMAT
REGISTER PRINTING IS
CURRENTLY RECEIPT
TO SET TO JOURNAL
PRESS YES AND ENTER
2. The REG. PRINTING FORMAT screen displays. Press the YES/NO key to
toggle from receipt to journal format. The screen will display the current status.
Press CASH to set the new format.
Stop Register Printing
You can turn the register printer to an on or off condition. In the off condition transactions
will not be printed, but reports will continue to print, if requested.
1. From the MANAGER MODE menu press 4 to set receipt printing on or off, or 5
to set journal printing to on or off (SPS340/345 only):
REG. PRINTING ON/OFF
REGISTER PRINTING
IS CURRENTLY ON
TO TURN OFF
PRESS YES AND CASH
2. The REG. PRINTING ON/OFF or JOURNAL PRINTING ON/OFF screen
displays. Press the YES/NO key to toggle from receipt on to receipt off. The
screen will display the current status. Press CASH to set the new format.
Note: When the receipt is off, a receipt may be printed after the sale by pressing CASH
after the transaction is complete.
98 • Management Functions
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Training Mode
A training mode is available so that the register can be operated (to practice registrations)
without updating totals and counters. If you choose to use training mode, you must set a
training mode password (see "Training Mode Password" in the "Program Mode
Programming" chapter.)
Note: If you make registrations to check tracking numbers in training mode, remember
that the check tracking total will be updated. Remember to pay, or clear the check file
(Reset Mode Menu/Z/Open Checks) before resuming normal operations. You must
close all open checks prior to entering training mode.
1. From the MANAGER MODE menu press 6 to enter or exit training mode:
ENTER/EXIT TRAINING
REGIST. IS CURRENTLY
NOT IN TRAINING
TO ENTER TRAINING
ENTER 4 DIGIT PASSWD
AND PRESS ENTER
2. The ENTER/EXIT TRAINING screen displays. The screen will display the
current status. To enter training mode, type your four digit password (you must
enter preceding zeros) and press CASH. To exit training mode, type 0000 and
press CASH.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Management Functions • 99
Electronic Journal 0peration
An electronic journal feature is available on the SPS-300. The electronic journal captures the
sales journal in the register memory. If you intend to use the electronic journal, you must
allocate sufficient memory (see "Memory Allocation" in the "Service Mode Programming"
chapter) and activate the journal and set related journal capture options (see "System Option
Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter.)
Use this program to print all or selected parts of the journal memory. Note: this program will
not clear the electronic journal. See "Reset Electronic Journal" in the "Z-Mode" chapter to
clear the E.J.
1. From the MANAGER MODE menu press 7 to display the electronic journal
menu:
0.PRT
1.PRT
2.PRT
3.PRT
4.PRT
5.PRT
6.PRT
ELECTRONIC JOURNAL
ALL EJ
ONLY CASH
ONLY CHECK
ONLY MISC/TEND
ONLY %
ONLY RA/PO
ONLY RETURN

2. Press PAGE DOWN to view the remaining electronic journal options:
ELECTRONIC JOURNAL
7.PRT ONLY ERR.CORR/VOID
8.PRT ONLY NOSALE
9.PRT ONLY CANCEL
00.PRT BY CLERK
DEC.PRINT ALL EJ (BY IRC)

3. Type the digit that represents the portion of the electronic journal you wish to
print. If you select 00 for print by clerk, you will be prompted to enter the
appropriate clerk number.
Note: If you select “PRINT ALL EJ (BY IRC)”, you will presented with the option to
print or save the report to SD. If you choose print, the EJ will print sequentially for
each ECR in the system. If you choose SD, you will save a file for each register that can
be viewed by the PC Utility.
100 • Management Functions
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Open Check (IRC)
CAUTION: SPS-300 Series ECRs do not share access to a common check file.
This operation allows access to the individual check files that are located in separate SPS-300
ECRs. This information is not consolidated, but rather reported separately for each register.
1. From the MANAGER MODE menu press 9 to report open check by IRC. The
display returns the message shown below:
MANAGER MODE
7.E.J. OPERATION
8.NOT FOUND PLU
9.OPE███████████████████████
█ SD : 0 / PRINT : 1 █
███████████████████████

3. Press 1 to print the report. The check file will print sequentially for each ECR in
the system, or
Press 0 to save the reports to SD. A file will be saved for each register. Use the
PC Utility to view the file.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Management Functions • 101
Report Table
Report Number
Report Type
Daily/
Period
Mode Available
Standalone or
IRC
1
Financial
Daily & Period
X and Z
IRC & Standalone
2
Time
Daily & Period
X and Z
IRC & Standalone
3
PLU
Daily & Period
X and Z
IRC & Standalone
4
Clerks
Daily & Period
X and Z
IRC & Standalone
5
Groups
Daily & Period
X and Z
IRC & Standalone
6
Day
Period Only
X and Z
IRC & Standalone
7
Stock
Daily Only
X and Z
IRC & Standalone
8
Clerk Time
Daily Only
X and Z
Standalone Only
9
Open Check
Daily Only
X and Z
Standalone Only*
00
PLU Zero Sale
Daily Only
X and Z
Standalone Only
DEC
Mix & Match
Daily & Period
X and Z
IRC & Standalone
Note: Reporting of individual register check reports by IRC can be done by selecting 9 from page 2 of the
Manager Mode menu. You have the option of printing the report or writing the report to an SD card. See
“Open Check (IRC)” on page 101.
102 • Management Functions
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Z Mode
Reset Report Mode
1. Turn the control lock to the Clear Totals position to display the RESET
REPORT MODE menu:
RESET REPORT MODE
0.Z REPORTS
1.RESET E.J.
2.PC COMMUNICATION
3.MIX & MATCH PROGRAM
4.MIX & MATCH SCAN
5.PLU LOOKUP PROGRAM
6.AGE VERIFICATION

2. Press PAGE DOWN to view the remaining Reset Mode options:
RESET REPORT MODE
7.RESET NOT FOUND PLU
8.KP STARTING No.
9.DATATRAN(DEBIT)
00.DATATRAN

Note: Option #8, KP Starting No. was added at firmware version 1.034.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Z Mode • 103
Z Reports
1. From the RESET REPORT MODE menu press 1 to select Z Reports:
RESET REPORT MODE
* ENTER REPORT# TO ISSUE
Z REPORT
* PRESS CASH TO VIEW REPORT LIST
* PRESS CLEAR TO RETURN TO
RESET REPORT MODE MENU
2. If you know the number of the report you wish to generate, enter the number and
press CASH. If you wish to look up the number, press CASH to view the Z
Report List, then press the number of the report you wish to generate.
Z REPORT LIST
0.FINANCIAL
1.TIME
2.PLU
3.CLERK
4.GROUPS
5.DAY
6.STOCK
P1 
Press PAGE DOWN to view the second page of reports:
Z REPORT LIST
7.CLERK TIME
8.OPEN CHECK
00.PLU ZERO SALE
DEC. MIX & MATCH
104 • Z Mode
P2 
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
3. When a report is selected, the Z REPORT OPTIONS screen displays:
Z REPORT OPTIONS
RPT# :
FINANCIAL
1. TYPE
0
0:DAILY 1:PERIOD
2. 0:PRINT
0
3. IRC
0
0:STANDALONE
1:ALL 2:SELECT
4. Select the TYPE (DAILY or PERIOD and the IRC configuration. Refer to the
explanations in the table below. Press CASH after each selection. After the last
selection, the report will start.
5. If IRC is SELECT, then the register selection displays:
Z REPORT OPTIONS
RPT# :
FINANCIAL
1. TYPE :
0
0:DAILY 1:PERIOD
2. 0:PRINT
0
3. IRC
2
0:STANDALONE
# 1Y  2N 3N 4N 5N 6N 7N 8N
6. Press the YES/NO key at each register # to select whether you wish to include
each register in the consolidated report. Press CASH after each selection. After
the last selection, the report will start.
Field
Description
TYPE
Select Z1 or Z2 if available for the selected report.
IRC
Select STANDALONE, ALL, or SELECT if available
for the selected report. If SELECT, the screen prompts
for selection of registers - the screen will initially show
the registers available from the from/to IRC register
programming, for example if the IRC range is from 1
to 3, then the selection will default to:
1Y 2N 3N 4N 5N 6N 7N 8N
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Z Mode • 105
Reset Electronic Journal
An electronic journal feature is available on the SPS-300. The electronic journal captures the
sales journal in the register memory. If you intend to use the electronic journal, you must
allocate sufficient memory (see "Memory Allocation" in the "Service Mode Programming"
chapter) and activate the journal and set related journal capture options (see "System Option
Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter.)
Use this to clear the journal memory. The journal will not be printed. To read all or selected
parts of the E.J., see "E.J. 0peration" in the "X-Mode" chapter.
1. From the RESET REPORT MODE menu press 2 to clear the electronic journal:
RESET ELECT.JOURNAL
ARE YOU SURE ?
NO
2. The screen asks: ARE YOU SURE ? Press the YES/NO key to toggle to yes
and then press CASH to clear the report.
Mix & Match Program
Retailers often offer discounts when multiples of different items are purchased. For example,
the offer: “save $5 on any three bottles of wine” can be handled by a mix and match discount.
The SPS-300 series can accommodate up to 99 different mix and match discounts.
This program sets the number of items that must be purchased to receive the discount and the
amount of the discount. You must also set the following additional Mix & Match Table
options that are set through separate programs:
106 • Z Mode

From Logo Descriptor programming in P Mode, you can set a 12 character
descriptor for the discount.

You must link eligible items to the appropriate mix and match table. See PLU
Programming in P Mode and go to Page 6 of the PLU options.

The mix & match discount can be set to be taxable (tax the net amount) or nontaxable (tax the gross amount). See Page 18 of P Mode System Options to make
this selection.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Mix & Match Price & Quantity Settings
1. Select Mix & Match Program from the Z Mode Menu to display the options:
MIX & MATCH
ENTER MIX & MATCH
NUMBER (1-99)
0
2. Enter the number of the mix & match table you wish to program and press
CASH.
MIX & MATCH
M & M 1
COUNT :
AMOUNT :
0
0.00
3. At the COUNT field, enter the number of items that need to be purchased to
qualify for the discount. At the AMOUNT field, enter the amount of the
discount.
4. Press CASH to advance to the next Mix & Match or press CLEAR to exit.
Mix & Match Scan
You can print out the options for each mix & match discount table. Select Mix & Match Scan
from the Z Mode Menu to print the scan.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Z Mode • 107
PLU Lookup Program
You can assign up to fifteen PLU LOOK UP keys on the keyboard. (See “Function Key
Assignment” in the “Service Mode Programming” chapter.) Each of the PLU LOOK UP
keys can be programmed here to list specific PLUs.
1. From the RESET REPORT MODE menu press 5 to select PLU LOOKUP
PGM. The PLU LOOKUP PGM screen displays:
PLU LOOKUP PROGRAM
PUSH LOOKUP NUMBER
TO BE PROGRAMMED
AND PRESS CASH
(1-15)
0
2. Enter the number of the PLU LOOKUP key you wish to program, press CASH.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3. With the cursor pointed at the first position of the PLU LOOKUP screen, select
a PLU by typing the PLU number and pressing CASH. The descriptor for the
PLU will display, and the cursor will advance to the next position.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
108 • Z Mode
PLU123
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
4. Continue to select PLUs for the PLU LOOKUP key as necessary. If you are
editing an existing PLU LOOK UP key, press CASH to advance the cursor
without changing the current line.
5. If you wish to remove an item from the PLU LOOKUP key, place the cursor on
the line to be removed, press the VOID key.
6. Press CLEAR to return to the RESET REPORT MODE menu and save
changes.
Age Verification
In most areas, the sale of tobacco and/or alcoholic beverages to minors is prohibited. The
SPS-300 series offers an age verification feature that helps control the sale of restricted items
by forcing the operator to enter a birth date before a controlled item can be registered. If the
date entered shows that the customer has not yet reached the appropriate age, the item cannot
be registered. This feature serves as a reminder to check the customer’s identification.
Because different categories of items might require different ages (for example, alcohol might
require age 21, while tobacco might require age 18) up to five different age categories can be
defined.
This program allows you to set the required age for each of the five available age categories.
See “Group Programming” in the “Program Mode Programming” chapter to link an age
category to groups of PLU items.
Note: When age verification is implemented, an age entry is required only for the first
controlled item from each age category.
1. From the RESET REPORT MODE menu press 6 to select AGE
VERIFICATION. The AGE VERIFICATION screen displays:
AGE VERIFICATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
0
0
0
0
0
2. Enter the age required for the first group of age-restricted items, press CASH.
(For example, enter 21 if the sale of liquor requires an age of 21. You must also
program the age verification category of “1” for all groups of liquor items.)
3. If other items are to be restricted by a different age, program additional age
verification groups as necessary.
4. Press CLEAR to return to the RESET REPORT MODE menu and save
changes
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Z Mode • 109
DataTran Operation Menus
1.
From the RESET REPORT MODE menu press 9 to display the DATATRAN
(DEBIT) Operation menu:
DATATRAN OPERATION .
0.PIN PAD INITIALIZE
1.CLOSE BATCH(DEBIT)
2. From the DATATRAN OPERATION (DEBIT) menu:
Press 0 to initialize the Pin Pad.
Press 1 to close the debit batch. You will be prompted “Are you sure?”
Press the YES/NO key to toggle to “YES” and press “CASH” to continue.
3. From the RESET REPORT MODE menu press 00 to display the DataTran
Operation menu:
DATATRAN OPERATION
0.INITIALIZE EFT
1.OPEN BATCH
2.CLOSE CURR. BATCH

4.CHG. BATCH NUMBER
5.ISSUE LOCAL TOTAL
6.ISSUE TRANSACTION
4. If necessary, press PAGE DOWN to display the second page of the DataTran
Operation menu:
DATATRAN OPERATION
7.ISSUE BATCH STATUS
8.DIAL IN LOAD
9.DIAL OUT LOAD
00.TIP OPERATION

5. See “Integrated Payment Appendix” on page 263 for detailed DataTran operation
instructions.
110 • Z Mode
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
S-Mode Programming
Overview
The following procedures are done from the Service Mode menu:

Hardware Tests

Clear all totals

Clear grand total

Clear PLU file

FLASH ROM Information

Memory Allocation

Assignment of functions to keyboard locations

IRC Options

RS232C Port Options

SD Card Operations, including Program Backup and Loading

Clear Current Batch (Integrated Payment Applications only)
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
S-Mode Programming • 111
 Turn the key to the S position (one position clockwise from the PGM position) to
display the SERVICE MODE menu:
SERVICE MODE
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

HW TEST
CLEAR ALL TOTALS
CLEAR GRAND TOTAL
CLEAR PLU FILE
FLASHROM INFORMATION
MEMORY ALLOCATION
KEY ASSIGNMENT
 Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the SERVICE MODE menu:
SERVICE MODE
7. IRC OPTIONS
8. RS232C PORT
9. SD CARD OPERATION
00.CLEAR CURR.BATCH
112 • S-Mode Programming

SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Hardware Test
Various components of the SPS-300 are tested by using this program.
1. From SERVICE MODE menu press 0 to display the H/W TEST menu:
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
TEST
TEST
TEST
TEST
TEST
TEST
TEST
H/W TEST
PRINTER
DISPLAY
KEYBOARD
MODE
RS-232
MCR
DALLAS

2. From SERVICE MODE menu press PAGE DOWN to display the H/W TEST
menu:
H/W TEST
7. TEST SD CARD
8. PRINTING PATTERN

3. Press the digit representing the test you wish to perform. See the table that
follows for notes about each test.
Hardware Test Table
TEST
NOTES
PRINTER
A printer test pattern is printed. The H/W TEST menu automatically
returns when the test is complete.
DISPLAY
A display test is initiated. The H/W TEST menu automatically
returns when the test is complete.
KEYBOARD
The display indicates: "KEYBOARD TEST". Press any key location
to display its' position. Turn the key lock to end the test.
MODE
Check the mode lock and/or the optional “real” clerk key lock with
this test. As you turn the key lock, the display will show the current
position. The display will also indicate the “real” key that is
inserted. Return the key to the SERVICE position to end the test.
RS-232
Select LOOP TEST PORT 1-4, Initialize Ethernet, or the IRC Range
test. To loop test port 1-4, a loop back connector must be in place.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
S-Mode Programming • 113
TEST
NOTES
MCR
Select to test read a magnetic card.
DALLAS
Option not available
SD
Insert an SD card and select to run a read/write test. The results will
print. Press CLEAR to exit the test.
PRINTING
PATTERN
ENDLESS PRINTING and LIFE TEST PRINT are factory tests.
Toggle the power switch on and off to end the test.
Memory All Clear
Before you use your SPS-300 Series ECR for the first time, you must perform a memory all
clear to insure that all totals and counters are cleared and that the default program is installed.
Go to “Clearing Memory” on page 30 to complete this procedure.
Clear All Totals
This selection clears all totals and counters, including the grand total.
1. From SERVICE MODE menu press 1 to display the CLEAR ALL TOTALS
screen:
CLEAR ALL TOTALS
ARE YOU SURE ?
N
2. Press the YES/NO key to display Y at the "ARE YOU SURE ?" question. Press
CASH.
3. The display reads: "PLEASE WAIT". The message "ALL TOTAL CLEAR" is
printed and the screen returns to the SERVICE MODE menu.
114 • S-Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Clear Grand Total
This selection clears only the grand total.
1. From SERVICE MODE menu press 2 to display CLEAR GRAND TOTALS
screen:
CLEAR GRAND TOTALS
ARE YOU SURE ?
N
2. Press the YES/NO key to display Y at the "ARE YOU SURE ?" question. Press
CASH.
3. The message "GRAND TOTAL CLEAR" is printed and the screen returns to the
SERVICE MODE menu.
Clear PLU File
This selection clears the entire PLU file, including totals, counters and programming.
1. From SERVICE MODE menu press 3 to display the CLEAR PLU FILE screen:
CLEAR PLU FILE
ARE YOU SURE ?
N
2. Press the YES/NO key to display Y at the "ARE YOU SURE ?" question. Press
CASH.
3. The message "PLU FILE CLEAR" is printed and the screen returns to the
SERVICE MODE menu.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
S-Mode Programming • 115
Flash ROM Information
This selection displays the version, check sum and date of the Flash ROM. You may be
asked to check your Flash ROM version if you contact your dealer for assistance. You should
also verify that all registers in an IRC configuration have the same version Flash ROM.
1. From SERVICE MODE menu press 4. The "PLEASE WAIT" message displays
momentarily until the SPS-300 FLASHROM INFORMATION screen displays:
FLASHROM INFORMATION.
VERSION :
USA 01.027
CHECKSUM :
A6D8
BOOT/APP :
0806/9ED2
PLUS USED:
300/2000
EFT VER. :
DTRAN 01.000
MAY.10 2012
PRESS CLEAR KEY
2. Press CLEAR to return to the SERVICE MODE menu.
Memory Allocation
Note: You must step through every memory allocation field to implement new memory
allocation. If you press CLEAR, at any field you will abort memory allocation processes
without making changes. Changes to Memory Allocation will clear all program data.
1. At the SM control lock position menu, press 5 for Memory Allocation
programming. The MEMORY ALLOCATION screen displays:
MEMORY ALLOCATION .
TTL AVAIL :
1855488
TTL USED :
314865
# PLUS
2000 
# LEVELS (1-5)
1
# CLERKS
10
# GROUP TOTALS
20
116 • S-Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
2. The total available memory is displayed on the first line of the screen (TTL
AVAIL). The total memory currently allocated is displayed on the second line of
the screen (TTL USED). The TTL USED field is updated when you complete a
change and press CASH.
Starting at the PLUs field, enter the quantity of each memory field. Press CASH
after each entry, and the cursor will move to the next field. Page 2 of Memory
Allocation will display after the # OF GROUP TOTALS field is set:
NOTE: You must allocate at least one line of electronic journal (EJ) and at least
one check for each clerk allocated.
You must
allocate at
least 1 EJ
Line.
You must
allocate at
least 1 check
for each clerk
allocated.
MEMORY ALLOCATION
TTL AVAIL :
1855488
TTL USED :
314865
# EJ LINES
1000 
# CHECKS
10
Y=HARD/N=SOFT CHK
N
# LINES/SFT CHK
50
3. Continue filling each field until complete. Press CASH after setting the last
field, "# LINES/SOFT CH". The screen will display "ARE YOU SURE ?". N
(No) will display as the default answer to the question. If you wish to implement
the new allocation you have entered, press the YES/NO key, and then press
CASH.
4. The message "PLEASE WAIT . . . . " displays until the printer prints either:
"MEMORY ALLOCATION OK !" or "MEMORY ALLOCATION SIZE OVER"
if you attempt to allocate features requiring more memory than is available.
5. The SERVICE MODE menu screen displays when memory allocation
programming is completed.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
S-Mode Programming • 117
Function Key Assignment
Any programmable key location may be reprogrammed with a function from the list of
available functions on page 120 of this manual. The default program installs the functions as
they are shown with the standard key legends.
To change the function on a specific key:
1. At the SM control lock position menu, press 6 for Key Assignment
programming. The KEY ASSIGNMENT screen displays:
KEY ASSIGNMENT
PUSH KEY TO BE
PROGRAMMED
0
2. Press any key location. The current key assignment is displayed:
KEY ASSIGNMENT
KEY NUMBER :
CURRENT ASSIGNMENT
CASH
ENTER NEW CODE,
PRESS CASH
322
0
3. Enter a new key code from the list of "Function Key Codes" on page 110 and
press CASH, or press PAGE DOWN to display a list of key codes on the screen.
FUNCTION
KEYCODE
-------------------------------NLU#1 - NLU#150(1-150)
ONE
301
TWO
302
THREE
303
FOUR
304
FIVE
305
118 • S-Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
4. With the key code list displayed, you can press PAGE DOWN repeatedly, or
PAGE UP until you find the key code you wish to use. Type the key code
number you wish to place and press CASH. The KEY ASSIGNMENT screen
displays again:
KEY ASSIGNMENT
PUSH KEY TO BE
PROGRAMMED
PRESS CASH TO EXIT
0
5. Continue to program function key locations as necessary. When you have
completed function key programming, press the CASH key to finalize. The
screen displays:
KEY ASSIGNMENT
PRESS ENTER TO SAVE CHANGES
OR
PRESS CLEAR TO EXIT
WITHOUT SAVING
6. Press CASH to save the changes you have made, or press CLEAR to exit
without saving changes.
7. The printer will print out a receipt showing all the changes made to the keyboard.
Notes:
1. Numeric keys (0-9), CLEAR, and CASH cannot be removed from the keyboard
unless they have been assigned to a new keyboard location. This protects the
programmer from accidentally removing keys that are required for register
programming and operations.
2. If you wish to program the CASH key, select it immediately after selecting KEY
ASSIGNMENT from the SERVICE MODE menu. After the initial key is
programmed, the CASH key is used to finalize the program.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
S-Mode Programming • 119
Function Key Codes
Code
1
150
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
Function
NLU 1
through
NLU 150
Numeric 1
Numeric 2
Numeric 3
Numeric 4
Numeric 5
Numeric 6
Numeric 7
Numeric 8
Numeric 9
Numeric 0
Numeric 00
Decimal
#/NS
%1
%2
%3
%4
%5
X/TIME
ADD CHECK
CANCEL
CASH
CHARGE 1
CHARGE 2
CHARGE 3
CHARGE 4
CHARGE 5
CHARGE 6
CHARGE 7
CHARGE 8
CHECK CASHING
CHECK ENDORSE
CHECK
CHECK TRACK #
CLEAR
CLERK #
120 • S-Mode Programming
Code
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
Function
CURRENCYCONV. 1
CURRENCYCONV. 2
CURRENCYCONV. 3
CURRENCYCONV. 4
DRIVE THRU
EAT-IN
ERROR CORRECT
F/S SHIFT
F/S SUB
F/S TEND
Function lookup #1
Function lookup #2
GUEST #
PLU (CODE ENTRY)
PRICE LEVEL 1
PRICE LEVEL 2
PRICE LEVEL 3
PRICE LEVEL 4
PRICE LEVEL 5
MACRO 1
MACRO 2
MACRO 3
MACRO 4
MACRO 5
MACRO 6
MACRO 7
MACRO 8
MACRO 9
MACRO 10
MDSE RETURN
MODIFIER 1
MODIFIER 2
MODIFIER 3
MODIFIER 4
MODIFIER 5
P/BAL
PAGE DOWN
PAGE UP
PAID OUT1
Code
402 416
Function
PAID OUT 2
PAID OUT 3
PAPER FEED
PLU PRICE INQ
PRINT CHECK
PROMO
RECD ON ACCT 1
RECD ON ACCT 2
RECD ON ACCT 3
SUBTL(SUBTOTAL
SCALE
SERVICE
TABLE #
TARE
TAKE OUT
TAX EXEMPT
TAX SHIFT 1
TAX SHIFT 2
TAX SHIFT 3
TAX SHIFT 4
TIME IN/OUT
TIP
VOID ITEM
WASTE
YES/NO
VALIDATION
PLU LOOKUP1 PLU LOOKUP15
442
443
444
445
PAYMENT
FINALIZE
JFEED
INACTIVE
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
IRC Options
1. At the S control lock position menu, press 7 for IRC Option programming. The
IRC OPTIONS screen displays.
IRC OPTIONS
REG# (1-8)
STORE#
FROM REG#
TO REG#
IRC RETRIES(0-99)
#SHARE KP REG#(1-8)
1
000000
1
1
3
0
2. .Page 2 of IRC Options will display after the #SHARE KP REG# field is set:
IRC OPTIONS
#SHARE DATATRAN REG#(1-8)
0
3. Refer to the table below to fill the fields on the IRC OPTIONS screen.
4. Press the CLEAR key to finalize and return to the SERVICE MODE screen.
Option
Entry
Description
REG#
1-8
Enter the sequential number of the register in the IRC
System. Use “1” for a standalone register.
STORE#
6-digits
Enter the store number
FROM REG#
1-8
Enter the number of the first register in the IRC range.
TO REG#
1-8
Enter the number of the last register in the IRC range.
IRC RETRIES
0-99
Enter the number of IRC retries. “3” is recommended
#SHARE KP
REG#
1-8
Enter the number of the register where the shared
kitchen printer is connected.
#SHARE
DATATRAN
REG#
1-8
Enter the number of the register where the shared
DATATRAN is connected.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
S-Mode Programming • 121
RS232C Port Options
1. At the S control lock position menu, press 8 for RS232C programming. The port
selection screen displays:
RS232 PORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
RS232
RS232
RS232
RS232
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
1
2
3
4
2. Enter the digit (1-4) corresponding to the port you wish to program. The
appropriate PORT PROGRAM screen displays:
PORT 1 PROGRAM PG1
BAUD RATE
0:9600
1:1200
2:2400
3:4800
4:19200 5:38400
6:57600 7:115200
PARITY CHECK
0:NONE
1:ODD
2:EVEN
DATA BITS(0:8 1:7)
0
0
0
3. At each field, press CASH to view the selections. Enter the digit representing
your selection.
4. Press PAGE DOWN to view page 2 of the RS232C port program:
PORT 1 PROGRAM PG2
STOP BITS(0:1 1:2)
0
DEVICE FUNCTION
0
------------------------------0:NONE
1:PC
2:SCL
3:RJ
4:RP
5:LIQUOR
6:SCAN
7:COIN
8:RESERVED
9:POLE
10:EFT
11:PDC
122 • S-Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
5. Press PAGE DOWN to view page 3 of the RS232C port program:
PORT 1 PROGRAM PG3
INITIAL FEEDING LINE ON KP
(0-20)
0
ENDING FEEDING LINE ON KP
(0-20)
0
INITIAL FEEDING LINE ON SLIP
(0-20)
0
6. Press PAGE DOWN to view page 4 of the RS232C port program:
PORT 1 PROGRAM PG4
PRINT LINE ON GUEST CHECK
(0-50)
SCALE TYPE
0:NCI
1:CAS
2:OZ
PRINTER TYPE
0:NONE
1:SAM4S ELLIX 10
0
0
0
7. Press PAGE DOWN to view page 5 of the RS232C port program:
PORT 1 PROGRAM PG5
PRINTER TYPE
2:SAM4S ELLIX 20
3:SAM SRP-250
4:SAM SRP-350
5:CITIZEN 3550/3551
6:CITIZEN 810
7:CITIZEN 230
0
8. Press PAGE DOWN to view page 6 of the RS232C port program:
PORT 1 PROGRAM PG6
PRINTER TYPE
8:EPSON TM-T88-2
9:EPSON U200
10:EPSON U295
11:EPSON U300
12:EPSON U325
13:EPSON U375
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
0
S-Mode Programming • 123
9. Press PAGE DOWN to view page 7 of the RS232C port program:
PORT 1 PROGRAM PG7
PRINTER TYPE
14:STAR SP-200
15:STAR SP-298
16:STAR SP-300
17:STAR TSP-200
0
10. Press PAGE DOWN to view page 8 of the RS232C port program:
PORT 1 PROGRAM PG8
POLE DISLAY TYPE
0:EPSON
1:ICD
RESERVED
0
11. Refer to "RS232C Settings Screen Program Notes" on the next page to fill the
fields for each port.
12. Press the CLEAR key to finalize and return to the SERVICE MODE screen.
124 • S-Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
RS232C Settings Screen Program Notes
Option
Description
BAUD RATE
Select 9600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38,400,
57,600, or 115,200 from the pop-up window; 9600 is
default.
PARITY
Select NONE, EVEN, or ODD from the pop-up
window; NONE is default.
DATA BITS
Select 8 or 7 from the pop-up window; 8 is default.
STOP BITS
Select 1 or 2 from the pop-up window; 1 is default.
DEVICE FUNCTION
Enter the code number for the device you wish to
attach to this port from the code numbers displayed.
The device function codes are:
1: PC Communications
2: Scale
3: Remote Journal Printer
4: Remote Printer
5: Liquor
6: Scanner
7: Coin Dispenser
8: Reserved
9: Remote Pole Display
10: EFT (i.e.DataTran)
11: PDC (DataTran Peripheral Device Controller)
PRINT LINE ON GUEST
CHECK (0-50)
Enter the number of lines that represent the maximum
that can be printed on a single guest check.
SCALE TYPE
Select the digit that represents the scale type connected
to this port.
PRINTER TYPE
Select the digit that represents the printer type
connected to this port.
POLE DISPLAY TYPE
Select the digit that represents the pole display type
connected to this port.
RS232C RETRY TIMES
Set the number of retries for RS232C communication
(about 0.5 seconds each.)
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
S-Mode Programming • 125
SD Card Operation
Utilities in this program include:
 Program Backup & Loading
 Report Backup
 Pre-Image Logo Loading & Backup
 Post-Image Logo Loading & Backup
Flash ROM update can also be done by SD card or through a serial connection to a PC.
Note: Note: The SD slot is located in the printer compartment. On the SPS-320, the SD
slot is located to the right of the printer mechanism; on the SPS-340 and 345, the SD slot
is located to the rear of the receipt printer.) Remove the security screw to access the
slot. See page 19 for detail.
1. At the S control lock position menu, press 9 for SD Card Operation. The SD
CARD OPERATION screen displays:
1.
2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
SD CARD OPERATION
PROGRAM BACKUP
PROGRAM LOAD 3. REPORT BACKUP
PRE-IMAGE LOGO LOAD
PRE-IMAGE LOGO BACKUP
POST-IMAGE LOGO LOAD
POST-IMAGE LOGO BACKUP
EACH PROGRAM LOAD
2. Insert the SD card in the register’s SD slot.
3. Enter the digit (1-8) corresponding to the function you wish to access. A
complete explanation of each function follows.
Note: Option “8”, EACH PROGRAM LOAD was added at firmware version
1.038. This option allows you to select an individual program segement to load.
Program components you can load individually include:
126 • S-Mode Programming
PLU
Group
Tax
System Options
Print Options
Function Key
Clerk
Logo Desc.
Report Logo
Stock
Misc.
Macro
PLU Lookup
Mix & Match
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Read Carefully: Store Name Notes
The store name you set on System Option page 18 is used to identify program and report data
on the SD card. Note that the default store name is “STORE_A”.
If you are using the SD Card to move information to a PC or use the program or report data
with the PC Utility, you must pay close attention to the store name. Do not use characters
such as “-“ or “/” that cannot be used in naming a folder on your PC. If you use such a
character in your store name, you will not be able to read the files on your PC.
The Store Name field is 8-characters in length. If the store name is set to less than 8characters, the 5-digit register number will be combined with the store name to create a
unique 8-character identifier. For example, if the store name is “AAAAAA” and the register
number is 05, the folder for the store data (both the PGMBACK and the REPBACK) will be
named “AAAAAA05”; if the store name is “DDD” and the register number is “12345”, the
folder name will be “DDD12345”.
Note: If you are Using an SD Card for the First Time . . .
NOTE: You must a use an SD card with a capacity of 1GB or smaller. SD cards must be
formatted as FAT 32.
CAUTION: Formatting the SD card will clear all data on the SD card and prepare it for use.
1.
Start Windows Explorer.
2.
Select the SD card drive, right click and select Format. (Win XP screen shown; slightly
different procedures are used with different operating systems.)
3. From the Format dialog you must select the
File System: FAT32.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Select
“Format…”
S-Mode Programming • 127
Program Backup and Load
You can use an SD flash memory card to backup and load (restore) the full program.
NOTE: The program data is saved in a separate folder on the SD card named with the
store name that is set on page 18 of system options. Note that the default store name is
“STORE_A”. See page 127 for more information about the store name.
Backing Up the Program to an SD Card
1. Insert the SD card in the register’s SD slot.
2. Turn the control lock to the S position.
3. From the second page of the Service Mode menu, select “9 SD Card
Operation”.
4. From the SD Card Operation menu select “1 Program Backup”. The SPS-300
will write the program files to the folder: SPS300/PRGBACK/STORENAME
(where store name is the name programmed on page 18 of system options.) In
the example below, the store name is “1719”.
5. After a short pause, the register will print confirmation of the successful upload
with the message “UPLOAD PASS” for each program segment. Below is an
Explorer view of the backed up files.
Restore Program from the SD Card
CAUTION: Memory allocation must be set the same as the saved program. Be sure to
print out the memory allocation so that it can be re-entered before restoring the program.
1. Set the store name to match the name of the store folder you wish to restore.
2. Insert the SD card in the register’s SD slot.
3. Turn the control lock to the S position.
4. From the second page of the Service Mode menu, select “9 SD Card
Operation”.
5. From the SD Card Operation menu select “2 Program Load”.
6. The register will print confirmation of the successful upload with the message
“DOWNLOAD PASS” for each program segment.
128 • S-Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Saving Reports to an SD Card
The SD card can also be used to save reports. Reports saved are the current X1 readings.
SD Report Notes

When backing up and restoring data, the store name must be programmed on page 18
of system options. The default store name is “STORE_A”.

The SPS-300 will write the program files to different folders depending whether REP
or CSV format is selected. For example:
o
SPS300/REPBACK/STORENAME/DATE (for REP format)
o
SPS300/CSVBACK/STORENAME/DATE (for CSV format)

The date folder is in YYYYMMDD format (for example 20111116 is November 16,
2011.)

Each individual report is named with the time of the report. For example
“CLK2332” represents a Clerk report taken at 23:32 (in a 24-hour time format.) In
this manner, multiple reports backed up at different times in the same day will collect
in the same “date” folder.
To Save Reports
1. Turn the control lock to the S position.
2. From the second page of the Service Mode menu, select “9 SD Card
Operation”.
3. From the SD Card Operation menu select “3 Report Backup”. The display
offers two format choices:

Press 0 to save in REP format. REP format is proprietary and can be
viewed using the SAM4s PC Utility

Press 1 to save in CSV format. This format can be read without conversion
by many PC applications, including Microsoft Excel™.
4. The register will print confirmation of the successful report upload with the
name of the report “UPLOAD” for each report. If the save is unsuccessful, the
register will print an error message.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
S-Mode Programming • 129
Load/Save Receipt Images
You can load a preamble and postamble image for your receipt or soft guest check. Before
loading, the images must be converted by the PC Utility to .img format. After conversion,
they can be loaded directly by connecting a PC to the SPS-300 or by copying the images to a
SD card and loading (or saving the image) using the SD utility program described here.
Note that after loading the images, you must set Print Options on page 14 of the Print
Options program to activate the image printing.
Preparing a Graphic Logo Bitmap for an SPS-300 Series
The image must be black/white, 384 x 192 pixels, and 10 Kbytes or less in size.
1. Open MS Paint.
2. Open the image file you wish to use.
3. Choose Attributes from the Image menu. The Attributes dialog box displays.
4. The image dimensions must be no larger than 384 pixels wide by 192 pixels high. If
the image size in pixels is greater than the maximum, you must resize your image.
a. Click OK to exit the Attributes dialog.
b. Select your image. (Choose Select All from the Edit menu.)
c. Using the handles of the selected image, resize the image. Keep the image in the
upper left corner of the screen.
d. Choose Attributes from the Image menu. The Attributes dialog box displays
again. Enter 384 in the Width field; enter 192 in the Height field; select Pixels
as the unit. Click OK to exit the dialog box.
e. Your image will be cropped to the 384 x 192 pixel size. If you cropped part of
the image you wish to keep, you can undo (Ctrl + Z) and try again. You may
have to experiment a bit to resize the image inside the 384 x 192 pixel limit.
5. After the image is sized, select Black and white in the Attributes dialog.
6. Save your image as type “Monochrome Bitmap (*.bmp,*.dib)” and confirm that the
size is 10k or less. If you resized your original image, you may wish to rename when
you save, so that you preserve a copy of the original image.
130 • S-Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Use the PC Utility to Convert the Image
1. Install the SPS-300 PC Utility on your PC.
2. At your PC, start the SPS300 PC Utility. (Select Start, Programs, SHC PC
UTILITY, SPS300 PC UTILITY.) The Store Setting dialog box displays.
3. If you are starting the SPS300 PC Utility for the first time, you must define a store
name, or if a store is already defined, you can select the store from the drop down
list. After the store is defined or selected, click Close. The PC Utility program
starts.
4. Move the bitmap (.bmp) logos you wish to use into the store directory
(i.e. C:\SPS-300PC\storename.)
5. At the PC Utility, choose Convert Logo Image from the Utility menu. The Bmp
dialog box displays.
6. Click FILE OPEN. Select the bitmap image you wish to use from the Open
dialog and click the Open command button.
7. Click the SAVE AS PRE IMG or SAVE AS POST IMG button.
8. When the image is selected, click OK. Verify that the message “Save As
UserPre.Img” or “Save As UserPost.Img” displays. If the file is too large, and
cannot be loaded, the message “File Size Error” displays.
Copy the Images to an SD Card
The PC Utility will create two image files:

USERPRE.IMG

USERPOST.IMG
They will be located in your PC at:
C:\SPS-300PC\Store Name
Copy the mages to the following path on your SD card:
SD\\SPS300\PgmBack\Store Name
Important: In the path: C:\SPS-300PC\Store Name, the store name is the name you
have defined as the store in the PC Utility. Note: You must use the same store name in
the SPS-300 Series ECR at System Options page 18. Note that the default store name is
“STORE_A”.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
S-Mode Programming • 131
Load the Images by SD Card
1. Insert the SD card in the register’s SD slot.
2. Turn the control lock to the S position.
3. From the second page of the Service Mode menu, select “9 SD Card Operation”.
4. From the SD Card Operation menu select “4 PRE_IMAGE LOGO LOAD”.
5. The message “PREAMBLE LOGO LOADED!” will print on the receipt printer.
Saving Images from an SPS-300 to an SD Card
1. Insert the SD card in the register’s SD slot.
2. Turn the control lock to the S position.
3. From the second page of the Service Mode menu, select “9 SD Card Operation”.
4. From the SD Card Operation menu select “5 PRE_IMAGE LOGO BACKUP”.
5. The message “PREAMBLE LOGO BACKUP!” will print on the receipt printer.
132 • S-Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Flash ROM Updates
The SPS-300 series register software is loaded in flash ROM. This program may
occasionally be updated by the manufacturer. Your SAM4s dealer can update the software if
necessary.
The Flash ROM can be loaded through a PC Utility or by SD card.
CAUTION: Flash ROM update by either method must be done by a qualified, trained
technician. DO NOT POWER OFF OR ABORT any program loading once it has
started. Failure to follow the procedures exactly may cause the program to load
incompletely and for the register to fail completely.
Flash ROM Update by SD
The SPS-300 Flash ROM program is contained in a file named SPS300.bin. This file will be
provided to the authorized dealer by CRS, Inc. and contains both the Boot program area and
the Application program area.
1. Create a folder named update in the root of the SD card.
2. Copy SPS300.bin to: SD:/update/.
3. Insert the SD card into the register. (The SD slot is located inside the printer
compartment. Remove the security screw and open the flap securing the SD slot.
Insert the SD card until you hear a click and the SD card is locked in.)
Boot Area Update
4. At the SPS-300, turn the control lock to the S position.
5. Power off the SPS-300.
6. Press and hold the Numeral 1 key on the keyboard. While continuing to hold the
Numeral 1 key, turn on the power switch.
7. A rapid beep-beep-beep will be heard. Release the Numeral 1 Key.
8. The display the display will flash slowly at first and then will flash rapidly.
When the load is complete (about 5 seconds), a rapid beep-beep-beep will be
heard again the display will stop flashing and display a green color to confirm
update completion.
9. Turn the ECR power switch OFF and proceed directly to the next step:
Application Update.
Application Area Update
10. Set the control lock to the S position.
11. Press and hold the Numeral 2 key on the keyboard. While continuing to hold the
Numeral 2 key, turn on the power switch.
12. A rapid beep-beep-beep will be heard. Release the Numeral 2 Key.
13. The display will flash (Current program is being erased), after a few seconds, the
display will continue to flash, but at a slower rate. This continues for about 1minute while the new program is being loaded. When the load is complete, a
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
S-Mode Programming • 133
rapid beep-beep-beep will be heard again the display will stop flashing and
display a green color to confirm update completion.
14. Power the register OFF. The FLASH ROM update is complete.
15. Remove the SD card from the register.
16. Perform a memory all clear on the ECR. The ECR is now ready to program or to
load a previously saved end-user program.
Flash ROM Update by PC Utility
Update Files
To complete the firmware update, you will be supplied with the following files:

NEWNET_DOWN.exe (The update utility program)

SPS300.bin
PC Connection Cable
YOU MUST USE Port #1. Use the following cable:

CRS Part # 522120 (Register DB-9MF COM 1 to PC DB-9F)
Update Boot Area
1. Connect the Serial Cable From ECR to PC.
2. At the register, turn the control lock to the S position.
3. Turn the power switch to the OFF position.
4. Press and hold the CASH and CLERK keys. (Use the keys in their default
locations, the upper-right and lower-right keys on the keyboard.)
5. While continuing to hold the CASH and CLERK keys, turn the power
switch to the ON position. (The display will illuminate and the error tone
will sound beep-beep-beep in quick succession.) Release the keys.
6. At the PC, execute the program “NEWNET_DOWN.exe”. The Download
dialog box displays.
7. Select the appropriate com port connection at your PC at the PORT# option
134 • S-Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
buttons.
8. Click SEL. find the folder where the update files are located and select
SPS300.bin.
9. Select Boot Area Only in the Select One option buttons.
10. Press OK Button. The download takes about 30 seconds; the scroll bar will
track the progress of the download. At the ECR, the display will flash slowly
while the update is taking place.
11. When complete, the message Completed displays on the PC. Click OK and
the Download program will close. At the ECR, the display will change to a
green color indicating the update is complete. Turn the power switch to the
OFF.
Update Program Area
1. Connect the Serial Cable From ECR to PC.
2. At the register, turn the control lock to the S position.
3. Turn the power switch to the OFF position.
4. Press and hold the CASH and CLERK keys. (Use the keys in their default
locations, the upper-right and lower-right keys on the keyboard.)
5. While continuing to hold the CASH and CLERK keys, turn the power
switch to the ON position. (The display will illuminate and the error tone
will sound beep-beep-beep in quick succession.) Release the keys.
6. At the PC, execute the program “NEWNET_DOWN.exe”. The Download
dialog box displays.
7. Select the appropriate com port connection at your PC at the PORT# option
buttons.
8. Click SEL. find the folder where the update files are located and select
SPS300.bin.
9. Select Program code + Font in the Select One option buttons.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
S-Mode Programming • 135
10. Press OK Button. The download takes about 3 minutes. At the PC, the
scroll bar will track the progress of the download. At the ECR, The display
will flash (Current program is being erased), after a few seconds, the display
will continue to flash, but at a slower rate. This continues for about 3
minutes while the new program is being loaded.
11. When complete, the message Completed displays at thePC. Click OK and
the Download program will close. At the ECR, when the load is complete, a
rapid beep-beep-beep will be heard, and the display will flash rapidly. Turn
the power switch to OFF, the program update is complete.
12. Disconnect the PC cable.
13. Perform a memory all clear on the ECR. The ECR is now ready to program
or to load a previously saved end-user program.
Clear Current Batch
The clear batch command erases all the current batch transactions from the DataTran memory
even if they have not been settled. A LOCAL TRANSACTION INQUIRY should be printed
prior to clearing the batch. This will ensure that the operator has the transaction detail to reenter if required.
This operation should only be done under the direction of DATACAP.
136 • S-Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming
Descriptor Programming Methods
Descriptors are programmable for PLUs, function keys, groups, clerks and the logo/messages.
There are two methods available to program descriptors, the Program Overlay Method and
the Descriptor Code Method. This chapter describes both methods. Refer to each program
area for specific steps for programming PLUs, groups, function keys, etc.
Program Overlay Method
SPS-320/SPS-340
This method is the default descriptor program method for the flat keyboard models: SPS-320
and SPS-340. When the descriptor field is selected on the program screen, you can simply
type the descriptor placing a copy of the overlay over the keyboard. Press enter to finalize
your descriptor.
1
11
21
31
41
51
61
71
81
91
2
12
22
32
42
52
62
72
82
92
FEED
JOURNAL
FEED
'
"
<
>
-
+
=
:
?
!
@
#
$
%
^
&
*
(
)
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
p
a
s
d
f
g
h
j
k
l
;
CLEAR
PLU
X/TIME
z
x
c
v
b
n
m
,
.
/
7
8
9
CAP
DOUBL
E
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
CAP
DOUBL
E
BACK
4
5
6
9
19
29
39
49
59
69
79
89
99
1
2
3
SUBTL
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
0
00
.
CASH
NOTE: Use the CAPS key to toggle between upper and lower case descriptor options.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 137
SPS-345
Descriptor programming by alpha code entry is the default program method for the SPS-345.
The standard configuration of this model has 21 keyboard PLU locations and will not support
descriptor programming by keyboard overlay. However, if the SPS-345 keyboard is
expanded to 63 keyboard locations, an option for overlay descriptor programming is available
by setting the program option.
Because SPS-345 key labels are inserted individually underneath the key cap, the overlay
function should accompany the key’s normal function on the key check, perhaps by placing
the alpha function in a corner of the key. The keyboard below shows the placement of alpha
function on the expanded SPS-345 keyboard.
FEED
JOURNAL
FEED
CAP
CLEAR
PLU
X/TIME
/
DOUBL
E
7
8
8
;
<
BACK
4
5
5
:
>
1
2
2
A
H
O
V
#
)
"
SPACE
B
I
P
W
$
-
,
SPACE
C
J
Q
X
%
+
.
D
K
R
Y
^
=
E
L
S
Z
&
F
M
T
!
*
SUBTOTAL
CASH
TEND
G
N
U
@
(
'
?
0
00
.
NOTE: Use the CAPS key to toggle between upper and lower case descriptor options.
138 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Descriptor Code Method
If you customize your keyboard by covering key locations, or by installing double or quad
size keys, you will need to program descriptors using the descriptor code method.
See “System Option Programming” on page 160. You must set the option “PGM DESC BY
CODE” found on page 17 of System Options to Y to use the descriptor code method.
Program Sequence
1. With the cursor pointed at a descriptor field, refer to the Descriptor Code Chart
below and type the code for the first character. Press the decimal [.] key.
2. For each additional character, type the code and press the decimal key. Each
character will be displayed as it is entered.
3. Press CASH when the descriptor is complete.
Program Example
To program the descriptor "APPLE", type:
[65] [ . ] [80] [ . ] [80] [ . ] [76] [ . ] [69] [ . ] [CASH]
A
P
P
L
E
Note:
For lower case enter 98 after the descriptor code. For example:
a = [6598] [ . ] [CASH]
For DOUBLE (wide) characters enter 99 after the descriptor code. For example:
A = [6599] [ . ] [CASH]
Descriptor Code Table
Char. Space
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
Code
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Char.
*
+
,
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
Code
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
Char.
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
Code
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
Char.
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Code
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
Char.
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Code
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
Char.
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
Code
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
]
^
_
93
94
95
Char.
Code
92
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
96
Back- CAPS Double 1line Delete
space
97
98
99
0
Program Mode Programming • 139
Program Mode Menu
 Turn the control lock to the PGM position. The first page of the PROGRAM
MODE menu displays:
PROGRAM MODE

0.PLU
1.GROUP
2.SALES TAX
3.SYSTEM OPTION
4.PRINT OPTION
5.FUNCTION KEYS
6.CLERK
 Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the PROGRAM MODE menu:
PROGRAM MODE
7.LOGO DESCRIPTOR
8.NLU CODE# PROGRAM
9.DOWNLOAD PROGRAMS
00.MORE
140 • Program Mode Programming

SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
 Press 00 to view the MORE PROGRAMS menu:
PROGRAM MODE
0.CLERK IN/OUT
1.PLU STOCK
2.DRAWER LIMIT
3.CHECK CHANGE LIMIT
4.TIME & DATE
5.TARE WEIGHT
6.MACRO
P1 
 Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the PROGRAM MODE page 2
menu:
PROGRAM MODE
7.MACHINE NO.
8.PC SCHEDULE TIME
9.TRAINING MODE P/W
DEC.LEVEL ACTIVATE TIME
00.SCAN
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
P2 
Program Mode Programming • 141
PLU Programming
To accommodate UPC scanning, each PLU can be given an identifying number up to 14
digits in length.
1. At the PGM control lock position menu, press 0 for PLU Programming. The
PLU PROGRAMMING screen displays:
PLU PROGRAMMING
0.ADD/MODIFY PLU
1.DELETE PLU
Add/Modify PLU
1. Press 0 to add or modify a PLU. The PLU NUMBER screen displays:
PLU NUMBER
* ENTER PLU NUMBER
AND PUSH PLU, OR
* PRESS A PLU KEY ON
THE KEYBOARD
0
2. To view the PLU # PROGRAMMING screen, enter the number of the PLU you
wish to program, or press a PLU key on the keyboard, or press a modifier key
followed by a the PLU key on the keyboard, or scan the barcode on an item.
3. Refer to "PLU Options - Reference Information" on page 144 to make program
entries or changes, press the CLEAR key to finalize and return to the
PROGRAM MODE screen.
142 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Descriptor
Type the descriptor
using the Program
Overlay, or by using
the descriptor code
method (see page
117.) The overlay
is automatically
activated when the
cursor is pointing at
the DESC field.
# of
PRICE/HALO
fields displayed
is determined by
memory
allocation.
PLU#
DESC: PLU1
PRESET
PRICE/HALO1
1 P1

Y
0.00
Press ENTER to
advance the
arrow to the next
option.
Press YES/NO
to toggle from
''Y' to 'N' for
yes or no
decisions.
PLU#
PRESET OVERRIDE
TAXable BY:
FOOD STMP ELIGIBLE
GROUP #1 (1-20)
GROUP #2 (1-20)
GROUP #3 (1-20)
1 P2
Y
1 2 3 4
N N N N
N
1
0
0
PLU#
NEGATIVE ITEM
HASH
SINGLE ITEM
NON-ADD # COMP.
GALLONAGE ITEM
INVENTORY ITEM
DISABLE
1 P3
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
PLU#
SCALABLE
AUTO SCALE
AUTO TARE (1-5)
CONDIMENT
COMP. CONDIMENT
PRINT ON RECEIPT
PRINT ON DISPLAY
1 P4
N
N
0
N
N
Y
Y
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Press
PAGE DOWN to
view the second
PLU
Programming
screen.
Press PAGE UP
once to return to
the first option on
a screen. Press
PAGE UP again
to return to the
previous screen.
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the third
PLU
Programming
screen.
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the
fourth PLU
Programming
screen.
Program Mode Programming • 143
If you wish the
registration of
this PLU to
automatically
cause the
registration of
another PLU,
Enter the PLU #
you wish to link
with the 10-key
pad. Enter '0'
for no link.
PLU#
PRINT ON CHECK
PRINT PRICE ON RECEIPT
PRINT PRICE ON CHECK
DISABLE PROMO
COUNTER NOT RESET
PRESET OVERRIDE
IN MGR CONTROL
1 P5
Y
Y
Y
N
N
PLU#
LINK PLU:
1 P6
MIX&MATCH (1-99)
DISABLE VOID MODE & RETURN
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 5th
PLU
Programming
screen.
N
0
0
N
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 6th
and last PLU
Programming
screen.
PLU Options - Reference Information
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
18 character
You can program a descriptor for each PLU. Type the
descriptor using the Program Overlay, or by using the
descriptor code method (see page 117.) The overlay is
automatically activated when the cursor is pointing at the
DESC field. The default descriptors are PLU #1, PLU #2,
etc.
PRESET
Y or N
Choose Y for a preset PLU. Choose N for an open PLU.
Open PLUs accept amount entries. Use open PLUs to enter
different priced items into the same PLU. Preset PLUs
automatically register a preprogrammed price when the PLU
is entered. Use preset PLUs to register an individual item
quickly and accurately. For example, cigarette packs or food
items can be assigned to PLUs.
144 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Option
Entry
Description
PRICE/HALO1
PRICE/HALO2
PRICE/HALO3
PRICE/HALO4
PRICE/HALO5
7 digit
amount
Up to five price levels are available. (Note that price level
fields 2-5 will display only if you allocate memory for
additional price levels.) If the PLU is open, the amount
entered here is the high amount lock out (HALO). You can
limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can be
entered into a PLU. If the PLU is preset, the amount entered
here is the amount that is registered automatically when the
PLU is entered.
PRESET
OVERRIDE
Y or N
If Y, you can enter a price to override the preset price.
TAXable BY TAX1
Y or N
Select N for non taxable items. Select Y to apply the
appropriate tax automatically for this PLU.
FOOD STMP
ELIGIBLE
Y or N
Select Y to accumulate a total of food stamp eligible items in
the current sale. The total can be viewed by pressing the F/S
SUB key and food stamps can be tendered with the F/S
TEND key.
GROUP #1
GROUP #2
GROUP #3
0-99
For each of three group assignments, enter a group where
this PLU's sales will accumulate. The number of groups
available is determined by memory allocation.
NEGATIVE ITEM
Y or N
Select Y to register items that subtract, rather than add to the
sale total.
HASH
Y or N
Items designated with HASH status add to the current sale,
but do not add to the registers grand total. HASH items may
or may not add to the net sales total - see system option
programming. Use hash for lottery sales or bottle deposits.
SINGLE ITEM
Y or N
Select Y for a single item PLU. Single item PLUs
automatically total as a cash sale immediately after the PLU
entry. Single item PLUs are used to speed up one item sales.
NON-ADD #
COMP
Y or N
Select Y to enforce the entry of a non-add number before a
registration can be made.
GALLONAGE
ITEM
Y or N
Select Y to compute gallons sold. The gallons sold will print
along with the price entry on the receipt. The total gallons
sold will accumulate in the PLU counter. You must program
the price per gallon (in tenths of a cent, i.e. $1.299 for $1.29
and 9/10) in the PRICE/HALO field.
INVENTORY
ITEM
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to track the number of items remaining
in inventory using the Stock report.
DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable the PLU. Entries can not be made into
disabled PLUs.
TAXable BY TAX2
TAXable BY TAX3
TAXable BY TAX4
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 145
Option
Entry
Description
SCALEABLE
Y or N
If Y, the PLU will work only when you are multiplying a
weight from an optional scale or when multiplying a
manually entered weight. (For example, enter weight, press
SCALE, then register PLU.)
AUTO SCALE
Y or N
Select Y if you wish entries into this PLU to be
automatically multiplied by the weight on the optional scale
AUTO TARE (1-5)
0-5
Enter a value (1-5) to indicate the number of the
preprogrammed tare weight you want to automatically
subtract when the PLU is used for a scale entry (using an
optional scale). Enter 0 to disable automatic tare
subtraction.
CONDIMENT
Y or N
Select Y if you wish the item to act like a condiment on the
kitchen printer. Items with this status will satisfy the
requirements of items with compulsory condiment status.
COMPULSORY
CONDMNT
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to force the entry of a condiment after
this item is entered.
PRINT ON
RECEIPT
PRINT ON
DISPLAY
PRINT ON CHECK
Y or N
Select N if you wish to suppress printing (or display) of the
item at the designated location.
PRT PRICE ON
RCPT
Y or N
Select N if you wish to suppress printing of the item's price
on the receipt.
PRT PRICE ON
CHK
Y or N
Select N if you wish to suppress printing of the item's price
on the check.
DISABLE PROMO
Y or N
Select Y to block the PROMO function on this PLU.
COUNTER NOT
RESET
Y or N
Select Y if you do not wish to reset the PLU item counter on
the Z PLU report.
PRESET
OVERRIDE IN
MGR CONTROL
Y or N
If preset override is Y, then you can force manager control
for preset override by setting this option to Y.
LINK PLU
14 digit
maximum
If you wish the registration of this PLU to automatically
cause the registration of another PLU, enter the PLU # you
wish to link with the 10-key pad. Enter 0 for no link.
MIX&MATCH#
0-99
Enter a value (1-99) to indicate the number of the
preprogrammed MIX&MATC TABLE. Enter 0 to disable
DISABLE VOID
MODE & RETURN
Y or N
If N, you cannot correct this PLU through void mode nor can
you perform a merchandise return of this PLU item. The Y
value is recommended when using liquor control systems.
146 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Delete PLU
Note: To delete a PLU, all totals for the PLU must be cleared from Z1, Z2, Stock and
PLU reports.
1. From the PLU PROGRAMMING screen, press 1 to display the DELETE PLU
screen:
DELETE PLU
0.DELETE ONE PLU
1.DELETE PLU RANGE
2. Press 0 to delete an individual PLU. The PLU NUMBER screen displays:
PLU NUMBER
* ENTER PLU NUMBER
AND PUSH PLU, OR
* PRESS A PLU KEY ON
THE KEYBOARD
0
3. Enter the number of the PLU you wish to delete, or press a PLU key on the
keyboard, or press modifier key followed by a the PLU key on the keyboard.
The CONFIRM DELETE screen displays:
CONFIRM DELETE
ARE YOU SURE YOU
WISH TO DELETE PLU#
CASH=DELETE
CLEAR=ABORT
4. Press CASH to delete the PLU; press CLEAR to return to the PLU DELETE
screen without deleting the PLU.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 147
Delete PLU Range
Note: To delete PLUs, all totals for the PLUs must be cleared from Z reports (including
Stock and PLU reports.)
1. From the PLU PROGRAMMING screen, press 1 for to display the DELETE
PLU screen:
DELETE PLU
0.DELETE ONE PLU
1.DELETE PLU RANGE
2. Press 1 to delete a range of PLUs. The PLU NUMBER screen displays:
PLU NUMBER
* ENTER NUMBER OF
THE FIRST PLU IN THE RANGE
AND PUSH PLU
0
3. Enter the number of the first PLU in the range you wish to delete and press PLU.
The screen prompts for the last PLU in the range:
PLU NUMBER
* ENTER NUMBER OF
THE LAST PLU IN THE RANGE
AND PUSH PLU
0
148 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
4. Enter the number of the last PLU in the range you wish to delete and press PLU.
The CONFIRM DELETE screen displays:
CONFIRM DELETE
ARE YOU SURE YOU
WISH TO DELETE PLU#
1234 TO
1240
CASH=DELETE
CLEAR=ABORT
5. Press CASH to delete the PLU; press CLEAR to return to the PLU DELETE
screen without deleting the PLU.
Note: Before a PLU can be deleted, all report information must be cleared. It may be
necessary to run a Z1 and Z2 PLU Report, and if the PLU is an inventory item, you
must change the stock to zero.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 149
Group Programming
Up to 99 groups (the exact number is determined by memory allocation) are available to
summarize PLU sales. Group totals appear on reports, so that you can track sales of different
types of items.
 The group descriptors programmed here will replace the default descriptors
GROUP 1 through GROUP 99 that appear on reports.
 Each PLU can report totals to one, two or three different groups. If a PLU sends
totals to more than one group, the group total that appears on the Group report
will not represent PLU sales. Therefore, you also have the option of deciding
whether each group's total will add to the group total on the Group report.
To Program Groups
1. At the PGM control lock position menu, press 1 for GROUP. The GROUP
PROGRAMMING screen displays: (The maximum group number is set by
memory allocation.)
GROUP PROGRAMMING
GROUP NO? (1-20)
0
2. Enter the number of the group to be programmed, press CASH. The GROUP#
PROGRAMMING screen displays:
GROUP #1 PROGRAMMING
DESC : GROUP 1

ADD TO GROUP TTL
Y
SEND TO KP
N
KP PORT# :
1 2 3 4 R
SAT.
N N N N Y
SER.
N N N N
PRINT RED ON KP
N
150 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
3. Press PAGE DOWN to view the second page of group programming:
GROUP #1 PROGRAMMING
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
GIFT CARD(1-2)
1:ACTIVATE
2:ADD
AGE VERIFICATION (0-5)
0
0
4. Refer to the table below to fill the fields of the GROUP PROGRAMMING
screens.
5. Press CASH to return to the GROUP PROGRAMMING screen. Continue to
program groups as necessary. Press CLEAR to return to the PROGRAM
MODE screen.
Group Programming - Reference Information
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a descriptor for each group. Type the
descriptor using the Program Overlay or by using the
descriptor code method (see page 117.). The overlay is
automatically activated when the cursor is pointing at
the DESC field. The default descriptors are GROUP 1,
GROUP 2, etc.
ADD TO GROUP TOTAL
Y or N
Select N if you do not wish this groups total to be
added to the total of all groups on the Group report.
SEND TO KP
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to send PLUs reporting to this
group to a kitchen printer.
KP PORT #
Y or N
For SAT: Select Y or N to direct items to the device
attached to port 1-4 of the server register. Use the R
option (Y or N) to print a kitchen requisition at the
register.
For SER: Select Y or N to direct items to the device
attached to port 1-4 of a satellite register. (You must
set the register number where the KP is attached at IRC
programming, see page 121.)
PRINT RED ON KP
Y or N
Select Y if you wish items reporting to this group to
print in red on the kitchen printer. (Note, the kitchen
printer must have red/black printing capability, and this
option does not apply to the register receipt printer.)
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 151
Option
Entry
Description
GIFT CARD
0, 1 or 2
If a PLU in this group is used to register a new gift
card, select 1 for “activate”. If a PLU is this group is
sued to add a value to an existing gift card, select 2 for
“add”. For normal PLU registrations use the default
value of “0”.
AGE VERIF.
0-5
When an item in this group is registered (first time in a
transaction only), the register will prompt the operator
to enter the customer’s date of birth. The sale of the
item will be registered only if the customer has reached
the appropriate age.
Set “0”for no age requirement.
Set “1” to “5” to check the date of birth against the age
requirement group set in Z Mode.
152 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Sales Tax Programming
The SPS-300 allows three calculation options for each of the four possible taxes.

Add-On - most sales taxes can be programmed by entering an add-on tax
percentage rate.

Tax Table - if a tax entered as an add-on tax percentage does not follow
exactly the tax chart follow that apply in your area, tax table programming
will match tax collection exactly to the break points of your tax table. (Tax
table programming allows up to 75 breakpoints.)

VAT - if tax is included in the cost of the item, you can use value added tax
(VAT) to calculate the tax share of each sale.

A fourth tax programming option, for the Canadian Goods and Services tax
(GST) can be set using tax rate 4.
Important Note: After you have entered your tax program, test for accuracy by
entering several transactions of different dollar amounts. Carefully check to make sure
the tax charged by the cash register matches the tax amounts on the printed tax chart
for your area. As a merchant, you are responsible for accurate tax collection. If the
cash register is not calculating tax accurately, or if you cannot program your tax
properly from the information in this manual, contact your Dealer for assistance.
Programming an Add-On Tax Rate Percentage
When tax requirements can be met using a straight percentage rate, use the following method
to program a tax as a straight percentage.
1. Turn the control lock to the PGM position.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE menu, press 2 to view the TAX
PROGRAMMING screen:
TAX PROGRAMMING
TAX NUMBER (1-4)
DESC : TAX1
TAX TYPE (0-2)
0 : ADD-ON
1 : TAX TABLE
2 : VAT
1
0
3. When the arrow is pointed at the TAX NUMBER field, enter the number of the
tax you wish to program. (There are four taxes available, enter 1, 2, 3, or 4.) The
arrow will move to the TAX TYPE field.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 153
4. Enter 0 for an ADD-ON tax with a straight percentage rate. The appropriate
TAX # PROGRAMMING screen displays:
TAX #1 PROGRAMMING
TAX RATE
0.000 
5. When the arrow is pointed at the TAX RATE field, enter the percentage rate for
the sales tax. For example if the tax is 6 percent, enter 6.000 or 6.0. If the tax is
7.5 percent, enter 7.500 or 7.5 using the decimal key. If the tax is 10 percent,
enter 10.000 or 10.0. Press CASH to set the rate.
6. The TAX PROG. screen will return prompting you to enter the next tax, if
necessary. Continue to program additional taxes or press CLEAR to return to
the PROGRAM MODE screen.
Programming a Tax Table
In some cases, a tax that is entered as a percentage does not exactly follow the tax charts that
apply in your area (even if the tax chart is based on a percentage). In these cases, we
recommend that you enter your tax using tax table programming. This method will match tax
collection exactly to the break points of your tax table.
Before programming, obtain a copy of the tax table you wish to program. You will need the
printed tax table if you wish to determine the break point entries yourself. The "Tax Table
Programming Example - Illinois 6% Tax Table" on page 157 is used as an example in the
steps that follow.
Note: You can enter up to 75 break points.
1. Turn the control lock to the PGM position.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE menu, press 2 to view the TAX PROG. screen:
TAX PROGRAMMING
TAX NUMBER (1-4)
DESC : TAX1
TAX TYPE (0-2)
0 : ADD-ON
1 : TAX TABLE
2 : VAT
154 • Program Mode Programming
1
1
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
3. When the arrow is pointed at the TAX NUMBER field, enter the number of the
tax you wish to program. (There are four taxes available, enter 1, 2, 3, or 4.)
The arrow will move to the TAX TYPE field.
4. Enter 1 for TAX TABLE programming. The appropriate TAX #
PROGRAMMING screen displays:
TAX #1 PROGRAMMING
FIRST TAX AMOUNT
0.01 
NON-TAXABLE AMOUNT
0.10
# OF NON-REPEAT
BREAK
# OF REPEAT BRK
5
3
5. Use the table below as a guide in filling the fields on this screen. After
completing these entries, your screen should look like the screen that follows.
Field
Description
FIRST TAX AMOUNT
Enter the first tax amount that is charged.
For this example the entry is 0.01.
NON-TAXable AMOUNT
Enter the highest amount where no tax is
charged. For this example the entry is
0.10.
# OF NON-REPEAT BRK
Enter the number of Non-repeat breaks.
For this example the entry is 5.
# OF REPEAT BREAK
Enter the number of repeat breaks. For
this example the entry is 3.
6. After entering the # OF REPEAT BRK field, the next TAX TABLE PROG.
screen will display. Using the printed copy of your tax table, enter information in
the SALE AMOUNT RANGE fields. Enter the information as it appears on
your tax table. Enter the high amount of the first range where you are prompted.
The low amount of the next range will be computed automatically. After
completing the tax range entries, your screen should look like the following
screen. Note that this screen should look exactly like the corresponding part of
the printed tax table.
TAX
0.00
0.01
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
TAX TABLE PROGRAMMING
SALE AMT RANGE
0.00
0.10
0.11
0.21
0.22
0.38
0.39
0.56
0.57
0.73
0.74
0.91 
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 155
7. Because this tax table has more than 5 break points (the number of break points
that can be displayed on the first screen), you must continue to enter SALE AMT
RANGE information on the additional screens until information has been entered
for each break point. After completing the tax range entries, your screen should
look like the following screen. Note that this screen should look exactly like the
corresponding part of the printed tax table.
TAX TABLE PROGRAMMING
TAX SALE AMT RANGE
0.06
0.92
1.08
0.07
1.09
1.24
0.08
1.25
1.41 
8. After you have completed entering the SALES AMOUNT RANGE information,
the TAX PROG. screen will return, prompting you to enter the next tax, if
necessary. Continue to program additional taxes or press CLEAR to return to
the PROGRAM MODE screen.
Note: Some tax tables are very complex. Contact your Dealer for assistance should you
have difficulty entering your Tax Table.
156 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Tax Table Programming Example - Illinois 6% Tax Table
1. Examine the printed tax table for the tax you are programming.
2. Calculate the break point differences by subtracting the high side of the previous
range from the high side of the sale amount range.
3. Examine the pattern of break point differences to determine when the break
points begin to repeat. Mark the beginning break points that do not fit a pattern
as “non-repeat breaks.” Mark the break points that are repeating in a pattern as
“repeat breaks.” Count the number of repeat and non-repeat breaks.
Tax Charged
Sale Amount
Range
$0.00
$0.00 - $0.10
$0.01
$0.11 - $0.21
11
$0.02
$0.22 - $0.38
17
$0.03
$0.39 - $0.56
18
$0.04
$0.57 - $0.73
17
$0.05
$0.74 - $0.91
18
$0.06
$0.92 - $1.08
17
$0.07
$1.09 - $1.24
16
$0.08
$1.25 - $1.41
17
$0.09
$1.42 - $1.58
17
$0.10
$1.59 - $1.74
16
$0.11
$1.75 - $1.91
17
$0.12
$1.92 - $2.08
17
$0.13
$2.09 - $2.24
16
$0.14
$2.25 - $2.41
17
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Break point
Differences
Non-Repeat
Repeat
Program Mode Programming • 157
Programming a VAT (Value Added Tax)
When a tax is included in the cost of the item, you can use the value added tax (VAT) program
to calculate the tax share of each sale.
1. Turn the control lock to the PGM position.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE menu, press 2 to view the TAX PROG. screen:
TAX PROGRAMMING
TAX NUMBER (1-4)
DESC : TAX1
TAX TYPE (0-2)
0 : ADD-ON
1 : TAX TABLE
2 : VAT
1
0
3. When the arrow is pointed at the TAX NUMBER field, enter the number of the
tax you wish to program. (There are four taxes available, enter 1, 2, 3, or 4.) The
arrow will move to the TAX TYPE field.
4. Enter 2 for VAT. The appropriate TAX # PROGRAMMING screen displays:
TAX #1 PROGRAMMING
TAX RATE
0.000 
5. When the arrow is pointed at the TAX RATE field, enter the VAT rate. For
example if the tax is 6 percent, enter 6.000 or 6.0. If the tax is 7.5 percent, enter
7.500 or 7.5 using the decimal key. If the tax is 10 percent, enter 10.000 or 10.
Press CASH to set the rate.
6. The TAX PROG. screen will return, prompting you to enter the next tax, if
necessary. Continue to program additional taxes or press CLEAR to return to
the PROGRAM MODE screen.
158 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Programming a Canadian GST
Tax 4 can be programmed to accommodate the Canadian Goods and Services tax (GST).
1. Turn the control lock to the PGM position.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE menu, press 2 to view the TAX PROG. screen:
TAX PROGRAMMING
TAX NUMBER (1-4)
DESC : TAX4
TAX TYPE (0-2)
0 : ADD-ON
1 : TAX TABLE
2 : VAT
4
0
3. When the arrow is pointed at the TAX NUMBER field, enter 4, press CASH
(CASH). The arrow will move to the TAX TYPE field.
4. Press CASH. The TAX #4 PROGRAMMING screen displays:
TAX #4 PROGRAMMING
TAX RATE
0.000 
GST IS TAXABLE BY
RATE 1
N
RATE 2
N
RATE 3
N
5. When the arrow is pointed at the TAX RATE field, enter the GST rate. For
example if the tax is 6 percent, enter 6.000 or 6.0. If the tax is 7.5 percent, enter
7.500 or 7.5 using the decimal key. If the tax is 10 percent, enter 10.000 or 10.0.
Press CASH to set the rate.
6. At the RATE 1 field, indicate if the GST is taxable by rate 1 (tax on tax) by
pressing the YES/NO key, then pressing the CASH key. The arrow advances to
the RATE 2 field. Enter taxable status for RATE 2 and RATE 3. The
PROGRAM MODE screen returns.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 159
System Option Programming
1. At the PGM control lock position menu, press 3 for SYSTEM OPTION
Programming. The SYSTEM OPTION pg 1 screen displays:
2. Refer to “System Options - Reference Information" on page 165 to make program
entries or changes, press the CASH key to finalize.
The 1st System
Option screen.
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 2nd
System Option
screen.
SYSTEM OPTION
P1
BEEPER ACTIVE
Y
RESERVED
CLERK ENTRY
0
0:PUSH 1:CODE
CLERK ASSIGNED WHEN CLERK KEY IS
PUSHED (1-00)
1
SYSTEM OPTION
CLERK IS Y:POP-UP
N:STAY-DOWN
DRAWER NEEDS TO BE SHUT TO
OPERATE
ACTIVATE OPEN DRAWER ALARM
P2
N
Y
N
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 3rd
System Option
screen.
SYSTEM OPTION
P3
SECONDS TO ALLOW DRAWER OPEN 30 
(0-99)
ALLOW POST TENDER
N
OPEN DRAWER ON POST TENDER
Y
ALLOW MULTIPLE RECEIPT
N
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 4th
System Option
screen.
SYSTEM OPTION
P4
CASH DECLARATION REQ
BEFORE REPORTS
N
MGR CONTROL TO TEND.
NEGATIVE BALANCE
N
ZERO BALANCE
N
RESET TRANSACTION NO.ON Z RPT N
160 • Program Mode Programming
Press ENTER
after making a
change, or press
ENTER to
advance the
arrow to the next
option without
making a
change.
Press PAGE UP
to return to the
previous screen.
NOTE:
Be sure to press
ENTER after
changing a
selection. If you
do not press
ENTER, the
change will not
be accepted.
Press YES/NO
to toggle from
'Y' to 'N' for yes
or no decisions.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 5th
System Option
screen.
SYSTEM OPTION
P5
RESET GRAND TOTAL AFTER
N
Z REPORT
OPEN DRAWER WHEN REPORTS
ARE RUN
Y
OPEN DRAWER DURING TRAIN MODE Y
DECIMAL PLACE (0-3)
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 6th
System Option
screen.
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 7th
System Option
screen.
2
SYSTEM OPTION
DATE FORMAT IS
0:MDY 1:DMY 2:YMD
MODIFIER
0:POP UP AFTER ITEM
1:POP UP AFTER SALE
2:STAYDOWN
P6
SYSTEM OPTION
% AND TAX CALCULATION
SPLIT PRICE CALCULATION
P7
0
0
0
0
CALCULATION CHART
0:ROUND UP AT 0.50
1:ROUND UP
2:ROUND DOWN
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 8th
System Option
screen.
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 9th
System Option
screen.
Press ENTER
after making a
change, or press
ENTER to
advance the
arrow to the next
option without
making a
change.
Press PAGE UP
to return to the
previous screen.
NOTE:
Be sure to press
ENTER after
changing a
selection. If you
do not press
ENTER, the
change will not
be accepted.
SYSTEM OPTION
P8
COMPULSORY EAT-IN T-OUT D-THRU
BEFORE TENDERING
N
HASH IS
Y:NORMAL N:NON-ADD
ALLOW PRINT SCREEN ON
X/TIME
Y
Press YES/NO
to toggle from
'Y' to 'N' for yes
or no decisions.
N
SYSTEM OPTION
P9
RESET Z COUNTER AFTER Z1 REPORT
FINANCIAL REPORT
N
TIME REPORT
N
PLU REPORT
N
CLERK REPORT
N
GROUP REPORT
N
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 161
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 10th
System Option
screen.
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 11th
System Option
screen.
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 12th
System Option
screen.
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 13th
System Option
screen.
SYSTEM OPTION
P10
RESET Z COUNTER AFTER Z2 REPORT
DAILY SALES RPT
N
PRINTER PAPER SENSOR ACTIVE
Y
DEACTIVATE SPLIT PRICING
N
SYSTEM OPTION
P11
ALLOW DIRECT MULTIPLICATION
N
INVENTORY CNT PGM
N
Y:ADD CURRENT LVL
N:COUNTER REPLACE CURRENT
LEVEL
GLOBAL ENTRY LIMIT (0-14)
0
SYSTEM OPTION
DISABLE PRICE LEVEL KEY
LEVEL 1:
LEVEL 2:
LEVEL 3:
LEVEL 4:
LEVEL 5:
P12
SYSTEM OPTION
PRICE LEVEL IS
0:POP UP AFTER ITEM
1:POP UP AFTER SALE
2:STAYDOWN
P13
ELECTRONIC JOURNAL
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 14th
System Option
screen.
N
N
N
N
N
Press ENTER
after making a
change, or press
ENTER to
advance the
arrow to the next
option without
making a
change.
Press PAGE UP
to return to the
previous screen.
NOTE:
Be sure to press
ENTER after
changing a
selection. If you
do not press
ENTER, the
change will not
be accepted.
0
N
SYSTEM OPTION
P14
PROMPT OPERATOR WHEN EJ BUFFER
IS FULL
N
STOP OPERATIONS WHEN EJ BUFFER
IS FULL
N
SEND ONLY NEGATIVE ENTRIES
TO EJ
N
X REPORT & DECLARATION TO EJ N
162 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 15th
System Option
screen.
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 16th
System Option
screen.
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 17th
System Option
screen.
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 18th
System Option
screen.
SYSTEM OPTION
SEND RESET REPORT TO EJ
N
DIRECT MULTIPLICATION MORE
THAN ONE DIGIT
TENDER VALIDATION
Y:AMOUNT TENDERED
N:AMOUNT OF SALE
SYSTEM OPTION
EUROPEAN ROUNDING
# START END
1
00 – 00
2
00 – 00
3
00 – 00
4
00 – 00
5
00 – 00
N
N
P16
N
VALUE
0
0
0
0
0
SYSTEM OPTION
P17
DISABLE NOT FOUND PLU
N
EMBEDED PRICE BAR CODETYPE
0
1/3/4/7
CLERK INTERRUPT
N
PROGRAM DESC BY CODE
N
AUTO CUTTER
N
USE SPOOL
N
SYSTEM OPTION
MCR CLERK SIGN ON
USE TRACK 1&2 : 0
TRACK 2&3 : 1
RESERVED
STORE NAME:
MIX & MATCH IS TAXABLE
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 19th
System Option
screen.
P15
P18
Press ENTER
after making a
change, or press
ENTER to
advance the
arrow to the next
option without
making a
change.
Press PAGE UP
to return to the
previous screen.
NOTE:
Be sure to press
ENTER after
changing a
selection. If you
do not press
ENTER, the
change will not
be accepted.
N
0
STORE_A
N
SYSTEM OPTION
P19
BACK LIGHT COLOR (0-7)
0
0:ON 1:RED 2:GREEN 3:BLUE
4:RED+GREEN 5:GREEN + BLUE
6:RED+BLUE
7:0FF
SELECT LANGUAGE
0
0:ENGLISH 1:SPANISH 2:FRENCH
PUERTO RICO RJ FLAG
N
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 163
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 20th
System Option
screen.
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 21th
System Option
screen.
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 22nd
System Option
screen.
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 23nd
System Option
screen.
SYSTEM OPTION
ALLOW PRICE LEVEL
ONLY MGR MODE
DISPLAY ADD PRICE
OF LINKED ITEMS
ALLOW SALE WITH 0 STOCK
ALLOW Z STOCK RPT
P20
N
N
Y
Y
SYSTEM OPTION
P21
EFT DRAFT IS
Y
Y:DATATRAN
N:FINE DINING
MSR CONNECTED
2
0:DATATRAN 1:PDC 2:REGISTER
PIN PAD TYPE
Y
Y:DUKPT
N:ROTAT
PIN PAD (0-4)
0
SYSTEM OPTION
P22
NO SIGN IF TRANSACTION
0.00 
TTL LESS THAN
DATATRAN WAIT VALUE
2
ON REMOTE REGISTER
MGR REQUIRED TO OPEN CHECKS
N
ALLOW Z CLERK TIME REPORT
IF EMPLOYEES ARE CLOCKED IN N
Press ENTER
after making a
change, or press
ENTER to
advance the
arrow to the next
option without
making a
change.
Press PAGE UP
to return to the
previous screen.
NOTE:
Be sure to press
ENTER after
changing a
selection. If you
do not press
ENTER, the
change will not
be accepted.
SYSTEM OPTION
P23
MGR REQUIRED TO ADD NEW CHKS N
CANADIAN ROUNDING ON CASH
Y
164 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
System Options - Reference Information
Option
Entry
Description
BEEPER ACTIVE
Y or N
Select N for a silent keyboard.
RESERVED
N
CLERK ENTRY
0:PUSH 1:CODE
0 or 1
Select PUSH for a push button clerk, select CODE for
a code entry clerk system (number - clerk or clerk number - clerk) sequence.
CLERK ASSIGNED
WHEN CLERK KEY IS
PUSHED (1-10)
1-10
If PUSH system is selected, you can select the clerk
that is signed on when the CLERK # key is pressed.
Note that the maximum clerk number you can enter
here is determined by how many clerks are allocated in
memory.
CLERK IS Y:POP-UP
N:STAY-DOWN
Y or N
Select Y for pop-up clerks, select N for stay down
clerks. With pop-up clerks, you must sign on for each
transaction. With stay down clerks, the same clerk
remains signed on until sign off.
DRAWER NEEDS TO BE
SHUT TO OPERATE
Y or N
Select Y to enforce closed drawer for register
operations.
ACTIVATE OPEN
DRAWER ALARM
Y or N
Select Y if you want the error tone to automatically
sound when the drawer stays open longer than the time
set in the following field.
SECONDS TO ALLOW
DRAWER OPEN
1-99
If you enable the open drawer alarm above, you can set
the length of time (1-99 seconds) before the alarm
sounds.
ALLOW POST TENDER
Y or N
Select Y to allow re-tendering should a second change
calculation be necessary. Re-enter the tendered amount
and press the CASH key to show the new change
computation.
OPEN DRAWER ON
POST TENDER
Y or N
If you enable post tendering, select N to not open the
cash drawer after the second tender.
ALLOW MULPTIPLE
RECEIPT
Y or N
Set to Y if you wish to issue more than one copy of a
transaction receipt.
CASH DECLARATION
REQ BEFORE REPORTS
Y or N
Select Y to enforce a cash declaration function before a
report can be generated.
MGR CONTROL TO
TEND.
NEGATIVE BALANCE
ZERO BALANCE
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to control negative transactions
(when cash is removed from the drawer). When
selected the control lock must be in the X position to
finalize the transaction.
RESET TRANSACTION #
ON Z REPORT
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to reset the transaction number
(often called the receipt counter) to zero after the
financial report is reset.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 165
Option
Entry
Description
RESET GRAND TOTAL
AFTER Z REPORT
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to reset the grand total to zero
after the financial report is reset.
OPEN DRAWER WHEN
REPORTS ARE RUN
Y or N
Select N to stop the drawer from opening when reports
are run.
OPEN DRAWER
DURING TRAIN MODE
Y or N
Select N if you do not want the cash drawer to open
during training mode operations.
DECIMAL PLACE
0-3
Enter a digit to place the decimal point the selected
number of positions from the right.
DATE FORMAT IS
0:MDY 1:DMY 2:YMD
0, 1, or 2
Select 0 for MMDDYY, select 1 for DDMMYY, or
select 2 for YYMMDD date printing format.
MODIFIER:
0:POP UP AFTER ITEM
1:POP UP AFTER SALE
2:STAYDOWN
0, 1, or 2
A MODIFIER key alters the next PLU registered,
either by changing the code number of the PLU so that
a different item is registered, or by adding the modifier
descriptor and not changing the code of the subsequent
PLU. If you press a modifier key, you have the option
of the modifier applying only to the next item (0),
having the same modifier apply to any subsequent item
registered in the same transaction (1), or having the
same modifier apply to any subsequent item on any
subsequent transaction (2).
% AND TAX CAL.
0, 1, or 2
Select the digit that represents the appropriate rounding
method for tax and discount calculations: 0 for round
up at 0.5 of a penny (0.005), 1 for always round up or 2
for always round down.
SPLIT PRICE CAL.
0, 1, or 2
Select the digit that represents the appropriate rounding
method for split pricing (i.e. 2 at 3 for $1.00)
calculations: 0 for round up at 0.5 of a penny (0.005), 1
for always round up or 2 for always round down.
COMPULSORY EAT-IN
T-OUT D-THRU
BEFORE
TENDERING
Y or N
Choose Y if you wish to enforce use of one of the
destination keys (EAT-IN, TAKE OUT, or DRIVE
THRU) before the sale is finalized.
HASH IS
Y:NORMAL N:NONADD
Y or N
Y: Hash adds to all totals except the gross and net
sales totals on the financial report.
ALLOW PRINT SCREEN
ON X/TIME KEY
Y or N
N: Hash does not add to any totals, except the HASH
total on the financial report.
166 • Program Mode Programming
Choose N if you wish to disable the print screen
function of the X/TIME key.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Option
Entry
Description
RESET Z COUNTER
AFTER Z1 REPORT
Y or N
Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the Z
counter after a Z1 of each report listed.
RESET Z COUNTER
AFTER Z2 REPORT
DAILY SALES RPT
Y or N
Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the Z
counter after a Z2 of the daily sales report.
PRINTER PAPER
SENSOR ACTIVE
Y or N
A built in paper sensor determines whether paper is
currently loaded in the printer. If Y, operations are not
allowed without paper loaded. If N, operations are
allowed when paper is out.
DEACTIVATE SPLIT
PRICING
Y or N
If N, both multiplication and split pricing calculations
can be done with the X/TIME key. If Y, only
multiplication can be done with the X/TIME key.
ALLOW DIRECT MULT
Y or N
If Y, you can multiply preset items by simply entering
the quantity, then pressing the preset PLU key.
INVENTORY CNT PGM
Y:ADD CURR. LVL
N:COUNTER REPLACE
CURR LEVEL
Y or N
Choose Y or N to determine whether the quantity of
inventory you enter in the PLU stock program adds to
existing inventory quantity, or whether it replaces the
current inventory quantity.
GLOBAL ENTRY LIMIT
(0-14)
0-14
Enter a digit to determine the number of numeric digits
that can be entered for any register function. Enter 0
for no limit.
DISABLE PRICE LEVEL
KEY
LEVEL 1:
LEVEL 2:
LEVEL 3:
LEVEL 4:
LEVEL 5:
Y or N
You can choose to disable any of the price level keys
here.
PRICE LEVEL IS
0:POP UP AFTER ITEM
1:POP UP AFTER SALE
2:STAYDOWN
0, 1, or 2
If you press a price level key, you have the option of
the level key applying only to the next item (0), having
the same level key apply to any subsequent item
registered in the same transaction (1), or having the
same level key apply to any subsequent item on any
subsequent transaction (2).
FINANCIAL REPORT
TIME REPORT
PLU REPORT
CLERK REPORT
GROUP REPORT
Note: Set to “Staydown” when using time activated
price levels. Also set level activate time in program
mode.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 167
Option
Entry
Description
ELEC. JOURNAL
Y or N
Select Y to enable the electronic journal. The
electronic journal captures in memory what you would
print line by line on a traditional journal. The four
options that follow control the electronic journal
feature. The electronic journal can be read and printed
in the X control lock position or reset and printed in the
Z control lock position.
PROMPT OPERATOR
WHEN E.J. IS FULL
Y or N
If the electronic journal is enabled above, select Y if
you wish to display a message to notify the operator
when the journal memory is full.
STOP OPERATIONS
WHEN E.J. IS FULL
Y or N
If the electronic journal is enabled above, select Y if
you wish to stop operations when the journal memory
is full.
SEND ONLY NEGATIVE
ENTRIES TO E.J.
Y or N
If the electronic journal is enabled above, select Y if
you wish to capture only transactions with negative
entries.
X REPORT &
DECLARATION TO E.J
Y or N
If the electronic journal is enabled above, select Y if
you wish to capture reset reports.
DIRECT MULT MORE
THAN ONE DIGIT
Y or N
If you allow direct multiplication of a preset PLU, you
can allow only single digit multiplication or
multiplication by more than one digit.
TENDER VALIDATION
Y:AMT TENDERED
N:AMT OF SALE
Y or N
Validation is allowed if an appropriate optional printer
is connected to an RS-232C port. Here you can choose
the content of single line validation
EUROPEAN ROUNDING
Y or N
Select Y to implement the rounding system that you
enter on this page. For example, enter a range such as
“.00 - .05” and then select the rounding value for the
range.
DISABLE NOT FOUND
PLU
Y or N
Select N to allow the operator to enter PLU prices and
other data when the entered PLU number is not found
in the PLU file.
EMBEDED PRICE BAR
CODE TYPE 1/3/7
1, 3, or 7
Enables price embedded bar codes:
1 = Type 1 embedded bar codes with a price check
sum.
3 = Type 3 embedded bar codes without a check sum.
7 = Choose 7 if you are embedding a weight, rather
than a price. Use weight when different items are sold
in bulk, such as nut/bolts in a hardware store. When a
weight embedded bar code is scanned the weight is
displayed and must be extended by a price at the cash
register.
CLERK INTERRUPT
Y or N
168 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Option
Entry
Description
PRG DESC BY CODE
Y or N
When N, program descriptors by pressing the
appropriate key on the program overlay. When Y,
program descriptors by typing the code for each
descriptor character.
AUTO CUTTER
Y or N
NOT USED.
USE SPOOL
Y or N
Choose Y if the paper take-up spool is being used
(single printer models only.)
MCR CLERK SIGN ON
Y or N
Choose Y to activate the optional card reader for clerk
operations.
USE TRACK 1&2
USE TRACK 3&4
0 or 1
Select the tracks read by the card reader: 1 and 2 or 3
and 4.
STORE NAME
8 characters
Stored files will be saved on SD/USB under a folder
with the store name. The default store name is
“STORE_A”. Do not include spaces in the name.
MIX & MATCH IS
TAXABLE
Y or N
If Y, mix and match discounts are taxable, resulting in
tax being applied to the net sale amount, rather than the
gross amount.
BACK LIGHT COLOR
0-7
0=ON (standard light blue backlight)
1=RED; 2=GREEN; 3= BLUE; 4=RED+GREEN;
5=GREEN+BLUE; 6=RED+BLUE
7=OFF (no backlight)
SELECT LANGUAGE
0, 1, 2
Converts system descriptors to selected language
PUERTO RICO RJ FLAG
Y or N`
For Puerto Rico Only.
ALLOW PRICE LEVEL
ONLY MGR MODE
Y or N
Choose Y to require the X Mode key to operate the
Price Level keys.
DISPLAY ADD PRICE OF
LINKED ITEMS
Y or N
When Y, the customer display shows a total of the item
and linked item. For example, if PLU is $1.00 and is
linked to PLU2 which is $0.25, the customer display
will show $1.25.
ALLOW SALE WITH 0
STOCK
Y or N
When N, inventory PLUs cannot be sold when stock
reaches "0".
ALLOW Z STOCK RPT
Y or N
When N, the operator is not allowed to clear (Z) stock.
EFT DRAFT IS
Y or N
Set EFT DRAFT to Y (DATATRAN) for a normal
draft. Set EFT DRAFT to N (FINE DINING) for a
draft with a tip entry line.
MSR CONNECTED
0, 1, or 2
Set MSR CONNECTED to 0 if the MSR is connected
to the DATATRAN. Set to 1 if the MSR is connected
to the PDC. Set to 2 if connected to the register.
PIN PAD TYPE
Y or N
Choose Y. (DUKPT is only type supported.)
PIN PAD (0-4)
0-4
Indicate port where PIN PAD is connected.
RESERVED
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 169
Option
Entry
Description
NO SIGN IF TRANSANCTTL LESS THAN 0.00
00.00
No signature requires if EFT transaction is under
amount set here. (i.e. if 20.00 is set here, no signature
is required on transactions under $20.00.)
DATATRAN WAIT
VALUE ON REMOTE
REGISTER
0
A setting at this field may be required in IRC system of
two or more SPS-300 registers where a DialTran
(telephone line authorization) and other peripherals are
shared. If an “INVALID ENTRY—TIME OVER”
message is displayed at a remote register, contact CRS
Technical Support for assistance is setting this field.
MGR REQUIRED TO
OPEN CHECKS
Y or N
Set this field to Y in a charge posting environment.
New checks can be assigned in manager mode.
ALLOW Z CLERK TIME
REPORT IF EMPLOYEES
ARE CLOCKED IN
Y or N
Option available at firmware version 1.031 or later
MGR REQUIRED TO
ADD NEW CHKS
Y or N
Option available at firmware version 1.035 or later. If
set to Y, The manager is required to start a new check
but the clerks can access it without the manager key
CANADIAN ROUNDING
ON CASH
Y or N
Option available at firmware version 1.043 or later.
170 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Print Option Programming
1. At the PGM control lock position menu, press 4 for PRINT OPTION
Programming. The PRINT OPTION pg 1 displays:
2. Refer to "Print Options - Reference Information" on page 175 to make program
entries or changes, press the CASH key to finalize.
The 1st Print
Option screen.
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 2nd
Print Option
screen.
PRINT OPTION
PRINT MEDIA TOTALS
ON CLERK REPORT
PRINT TAX SYMBOL
PRINT VD MODE AND RETURN
ON REPORT
PRINT AUDACTION ON REPORT
P1
PRINT OPTION
SKIP ZERO TOTALS ON
FINANCIAL REPORT
SKIP ZERO TOTALS ON
CLERK REPORT
PRINT CLERK REPORT AFTER
FINANCIAL REPORT
PRINT SALE ITEM NO.
P2
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 3rd
Print Option
screen.
PRINT OPTION
P3
PRINT PLU WITH ZERO TOTALS
ON REPORT
N
PRINT SUBTOTAL WHEN PRESSED
N
PRINT % OF SALES ON PLU REPORT
N
PRINT CONSECUTIVE NO.
Y
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 4th
Print Option
screen.
PRINT OPTION
PRINT DATE
PRINT TIME
PRINT MACHINE NO.
PRINT CLERK NAME
HOME CURRENCY SYMBOL IS
PRINT Z COUNTER
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
P4
$
Y
Y
Y
Y
Press ENTER
after making a
change, or press
ENTER to
advance the
arrow to the next
option without
making a
change.
Press PAGE UP
to return to the
previous screen.
NOTE:
Be sure to press
ENTER after
changing a
selection. If you
do not press
ENTER, the
change will not
be accepted.
Press YES/NO
to toggle from
'Y' to 'N' for yes
or no decisions.
Y
Program Mode Programming • 171
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 5th
Print Option
screen.
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 6th
Print Option
screen.
PRINT OPTION
P5
PRINT RECEIPT WHEN SIGN ON/OFF
PRINT GRAND TOTAL
ON X REPORT
ON Z REPORT
PRINT
ON X
ON Z
PRINT
Y
Y
PRINT OPTION
GROSS TOTAL
REPORT
REPORT
SUBTOTAL W/O TAX
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 8th
Print Option
screen.
PRINT OPTION
PRINT TAX AMOUNT
PRT TAXABLE TOTAL
PRINT TAX % RATE
VAT BREAKDOWN
PRINT TRAIN MODE TITLE
IN TRAINING MODE
PRINT OPTION
CURRENCY SYMBOL
CONV#1
CONV#2
CONV#3
CONV#4
E.J. PORT (0-4)
REPORT PORT(0-4)
172 • Program Mode Programming
Press ENTER
after making a
change, or press
ENTER to
advance the
arrow to the next
option without
making a
change.
P6
TAX AMOUNT IS
Y:COMBINE
N:ITEMIZE
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 7th
Print Option
screen.
Y
P7
Y
Y
N
Press PAGE UP
to return to the
previous screen.
N
NOTE:
Be sure to press
ENTER after
changing a
selection. If you
do not press
ENTER, the
change will not
be accepted.
Y
N
N
N
Y
Press YES/NO
to toggle from
'Y' to 'N' for yes
or no decisions.
P8
.
.
.
.

0
0
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 9th
Print Option
screen.
PRINT OPTION
PRT KP ORDER # ON RECEIPT
P9
PRINT PRICE ON KP
SEND TO KP IN VOID MODE
N
Y
SEND TO KP IN TRAIN MODE
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 10th
Print Option
screen.
PRINT OPTION
COMBINE LIKE ITEMS ON KP
N
P10
CONSOLIDATION ON CHECK TRACK
VOLUME UNIT
0:GAL
1:LTR
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 11th
Print Option
screen.
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 12th
Print Option
screen.
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 13th
Print Option
screen.
Y
PRINT OPTION
PRINT PREAMBLE
PRINT POSTAMBLE
MESSAGE ON RECEIPT
PRINT PREAMBLE
PRINT POSTAMBLE
ON THE GUEST CHECK
P11
PRINT OPTION
PRINT ON FINANCIAL REPORT
AVG ITEM/CUST
AVG $/CUST
BUFFER RECEIPT ISSUE WHEN
RECEIPT IS ON
PRIORITY PRINT BY GROUP
ON KP/KV
P12
N
Press ENTER
after making a
change, or press
ENTER to
advance the
arrow to the next
option without
making a
change.
Press PAGE UP
to return to the
previous screen.
N
0
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
PRINT OPTION
P13
GRAND TOTAL IS
N
Y: NET
N: GROSS
PRINT E.J FROM
N
Y:OLDEST
N:NEWEST
PRINT JOURNAL IS SMALL
N
SEND ORDER TO KP AT SUBTOTAL N
PRINT PLU# ON REPORT
N
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 173
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 14th
Print Option
screen.
PRINT OPTION
PRINT PLU# ON RECEIPT
PRE-PRN GRAPHIC LOGO
POST-PRN GRAPHIC LOGO
ON RECEIPT
PRE-PRN GRAPHIC LOGO
POST-PRN GRAPHIC LOGO
ON GUEST CHECK
P14
N
N
N
N
N
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 15th
Print Option
screen.
PRINT OPTION
P15
PRE-FEED LINE# RECEIPT (0-5) 0 
POST-FEED LINE# RECEIPT (0-5) 0
PRINT IN HIGH DENSITY
N
PRINT DATE ON SERVICE
N
ON HARD CHECK
PRINT TAX CHARGED
N
FOR LAST SERVICED ITEMS
Press
PAGE DOWN
to view the 16th
Print Option
screen.
PRINT OPTION
P16
NOT PRINT WHEN POLLING REPORT N 
PRINT WHEN PROGRAM UP/DOWN
N
ADJUSTABLE CUT (0-70)
40
COPY OF DATATRAN RECPT.(0-99) 1
PRINT WHOLE CARD NO.
N
PRINT EXP. DATE
N
PRINT LAST LINE OF EJ
0
174 • Program Mode Programming
Press ENTER
after making a
change, or press
ENTER to
advance the
arrow to the next
option without
making a
change.
Press PAGE UP
to return to the
previous screen.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Print Options - Reference Information
Option
Entry
Description
PRINT MEDIA TOTALS
ON CLERK REPORT
Y or N
Select Y to print media totals for each clerk, thus
allowing clerk cash drawer accountability.
PRINT TAX SYMBOL
Y or N
Select N to remove the tax symbol (i.e."T1") from the
print and display.
PRINT VD MODE AND
RETURN ON REPORT
Y or N
Select N to remove the VOID MODE and RETURN
totals from the financial and clerk reports.
PRINT AUDACTION ON
REPORT
Y or N
Select N to remove the AUDACTION total from the
financial and clerk reports.
SKIP ZERO TOTALS ON
FINANCIAL REPORT
Y or N
By default, the register prints only totals with
information other than zero. Select N, if you wish to
print the contents of all the financial report totals, even
if the total is zero.
SKIP ZERO TOTALS ON
CLERK REPORT
Y or N
By default, the register prints only totals with
information other than zero. Select N, if you wish to
print the contents of all the clerk report totals, even if
the total is zero.
PRT CLERK REPORT
AFT FINANCIAL RPT
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to include the clerk report
information at the end of the financial report.
PRINT PLU WITH ZERO
TOTALS ON REPORT
Y or N
By default, the register prints only totals with
information other than zero. Select Y, if you wish to
print the contents of all the PLUs, even if the total is
zero.
PRINT SUBTOTAL
WHEN PRESSED
Y or N
Select Y if you wish the subtotal to print when the
SUBTL key is pressed.
PRINT % OF SALES ON
PLU REPORT
Y or N
The register can calculate the percentage of sales
represented by each PLU. Select Y if you wish to print
this percentage on the PLU report. Note: the
percentage will print only on standalone register
reports, not IRC report.
PRINT CONS. NO.
Y or N
The consecutive number (also referred to as the
transaction counter, or receipt counter) normally prints
on each receipt. Select N if you do not wish to print
this counter.
PRINT DATE
Y or N
Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the date.
PRINT TIME
Y or N
Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the time.
PRINT MACHINE NO.
Y or N
If you are using more than one cash register, you can
identify the specific register where a receipt was
printed. Enter Y if you wish to print the register
number on the receipt.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 175
Option
Entry
Description
PRINT CLERK NAME
Y or N
Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the clerk
name on the receipt.
HOME CURRENCY SYM
$
Users outside of the USA can designate a different
currency symbol. To select a different symbol, press
the symbol you wish to use on the Alpha Keyboard
overlay. When this field is selected, press 00 to display
a list of optional symbols.
PRINT Z COUNTER
Y or N
Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the reset
counter on Z reports.
PRINT RECEIPT WHEN
SIGN ON/OFF
Y or N
Select N if you do not wish to print a receipt when
signing on or off a clerk.
PRINT GRAND TOTAL
ON X REPORT
ON Z REPORT
Y or N
Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the grand
total on the financial report reading (X report) or
financial report resetting (Z report).
PRINT GROSS TOTAL
ON X REPORT
ON Z REPORT
Y or N
Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the gross
sales total on the financial report reading (X report) or
financial report resetting (Z report).
PRINT SUBTOTAL W/O
TAX
Y or N
If you hand-write credit card slips, you may find it
useful to print the merchandise subtotal. Select Y if
you wish to print the subtotal without tax on the
receipt.
TAX AMOUNT IS
Y:COMBINE N:ITEMIZE
Y or N
Select Y if you are calculating and reporting more that
one sales tax rate separately and you wish to print just
the total of multiple taxes rather than itemize each tax
on the receipt.
PRINT TAX AMOUNT
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to delete the printing of the tax
amount on the receipt.
PRINT TAXABLE TOTAL
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to print the total of merchandise
eligible for each tax on the receipt.
PRINT TAX % RATE
Y or N
If you are calculating a tax percentage (add-on or
VAT), select Y if you wish to print the tax rate on each
receipt.
VAT BREAKDOWN
Y or N
If Y, a breakdown of the VAT eligible sale will print,
the net amount and the VAT amount.
INCLUDE VAT TAX
IN TAX AMT
Y or N
Choose Y to print the VAT tax amount on the receipt,
and include the VAT tax amount with other taxes, if
applicable.
PRINT TRAIN MODE
TITLE IN TRAIN MODE
Y or N
When in training mode, the message "TRAIN MODE"
normally prints on each receipt. Select N if you wish
to delete this message.
176 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Option
Entry
Description
CURRENCY SYMBOL
CONV.#1
CONV.#2
CONV.#3
CONV.#4
Y or N
If you are using the currency conversion feature, you
can select the appropriate symbol for each foreign
currency you are accepting. To select a different
symbol, press the symbol you wish to use on the Alpha
Keyboard overlay. When one of these fields are
selected, press 00 to display a list of optional symbols.
PRINT KP ORDER # ON
RECEIPT
Y or N
A system wide counter creates an order number for
each kitchen requisition. Choose Y or N to print the
order number on the kitchen printer requisition.
PRINT PRICE ON KP
Y or N
You can choose to print the item with or without its'
price on the kitchen requisition.
SEND TO KP IN
VOID MODE
Y or N
You can choose whether to print or not print
registrations in void mode on kitchen requisitions.
SEND TO KP IN
TRAIN MODE
Y or N
You can choose whether to print or not print
registrations in training mode on kitchen requisitions.
COMBINE LIKE ITEMS
ON KP
Y or N
If two of the same items are registered in the same
transaction, you can choose the format on the kitchen
requisition. For example, if Y, "2 HAMBURGERS; if
N, "1 HAMBURGER" and "1 HAMBURGER".
CONSOLIDATION ON
CHECK TRACK
Y or N
Consolidation of like items can be selected for soft
guest check printing. For example, if three rounds of
drinks are served, the check will print "3 TAP BEER"
rather than "1 TAP BEER" three times.
VOLUME UNIT
0:GAL 1:LTR
0 or 1
If gallonage is selected in PLU programming, choose
gallons or liters here.
PRINT PREAMBLE
Y or N
Choose whether to print the PREAMBLE on the
receipt.
PRINT POSTAMBLE
MESG ON RECEIPT
Y or N
Choose whether to print the POSTAMBLE on the
receipt.
PRINT PREAMBLE
Y or N
Choose whether to print the PREAMBLE on the guest
check.
PRINT POSTAMBLE
ON THE GUEST CHECK
Y or N
Choose whether to print the POSTAMBLE on the guest
check.
PRINT ON FIN RPT
AVG ITEM/CUST
AVG $/CUST
Y or N
Choose whether to print the average items per customer
(PLU sales counter/Net sales counter) or the average
sales per customer (Net Sales/Net Sales counter).
BUFFER RECEIPT ISSUE
WHEN REC IN ON
Y or N
Determine whether you can issue a second receipt for
the same transaction with the CASH key
PRIORITY PRINT BY
GROUP ON KP/KV
Y or N
If Y, the order in which items appear on a kitchen
requisition is determined by the group to which the
item is assigned, i.e. items reported to group 1 will
print before items reported to group 2.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 177
Option
Entry
Description
PRINT PLU # ON
RECEIPT
Y or N
If Y, the PLU number and descriptor will print. If N,
only the PLU number will print.
E.J. PORT
0, 1, or 2
Choose a port for a remote printer to print electronic
journal reports instead of the register printer.
REPORT PORT
0, 1, or 2
Choose a port for a remote printer to print reports
instead of the register printer.
PRINT E.J FROM
Y:OLDEST N:NEWEST
Y or N
Y: Prints electronic journal from lowest consecutive
number to highest.
N: Prints electronic journal from highest consecutive
number to lowest.
NOT PRINT WHEN
POLLING REPORTS
Y or N
Choose Y if you would like to suppress register
printing when reports are polled.
PRINT PLU #
ON PLU REPORT
Y or N
Determines whether PLU# is displayed on the report.
GRAND TOTAL IS
Y:NET N:GROSS
Y or N
Choose Y if you wish the grand total to accumulate
daily net sales totals. Choose N if you wish the grand
total to accumulate daily gross sales totals.
SEND ORDER TO KP
AT SUBTOTAL
Y or N
Choose Y to print orders on the KP when the
SUBTOTAL key is pressed. Choose N to print orders
on the KP when the order is finalized.
PRINT DATE ON
SERV ON HARD CHECK
COPY OF DATATRAN
RECEIPT (0-99)
PRT WHOLE CARD NO.
Y or N
PRT EXP. DATE
Y or N
PRINT LAST LINE OF EJ
00
If Y, the posting date will print at every posting on the
hard check.
Enter the number of copies of the DataTran (integrated
credit) receipts.
If N, only the last four digits of the credit/debit card
will print.
If N, the credit card expiration date will not print on the
DataTran (integrated credit) receipt.
Quick journal review (R-Mode/10 Subtotal) prints last
xx lines of electronic journal. (Where xx is 0-99.)
0-99
Y or N
178 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Clerk Programming
1. At the PGM control lock position menu, press 6 for CLERK. The CLERK
NUMBER screen displays:
CLERK NUMBER
CLERK NO? (1-99)
0
2. Enter the clerk number 1-99, (the actual number of clerks is set in memory
allocation). Press the CASH key to display the CLERK # programming screen:
CLERK #1 PROGRAMMING
NAME : CLERK 1
PASSWORD
DRAWER ASSIGN(0-2)
Descriptor
Type the descriptor using
the Program Overlay or by
using the descriptor code
method (see page 117.).
The overlay is
automatically activated
when the cursor is
pointing at the DESC
field.

0
1
Press
ENTER to
advance
the arrow
to the next
option.
3. Refer to "Clerk Programming - Reference Information" to make choices or
changes on the screens provided.
4. After making new entries or changes for a function key, press the CLEAR key to
finalize and return to the PROGRAM MODE screen.
Clerk Programming - Reference Information
Option
Entry
Description
NAME
Alpha
numeric
12 character
PASSWORD
10 digit
number
DRAWER
0-2
You can program a descriptor for each clerk. The name you
program will print on the receipt in place of the default
CLERK #1-99. Type the descriptor using the Program
Overlay or by using the descriptor code method (see page
117.) The overlay is automatically activated when the cursor
is pointing at the DESC field.
If you are using a direct or code entry clerk system. The
number you set here is the number you must use to sign on
or clock in/out. If using an optional card reader, you must
swipe the employee card at this field.
Enter 0 to allow check track operations only. (No cash sales.)
Enter 1 or 2 (with the multiple drawer option) to select
which drawer the clerk will open.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 179
Function Key Programming
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 5 for FUNCTION KEY. The
FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM screen displays:
FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
PUSH FUNCTION KEY TO
BE PROGRAMMED
2. Press the function key you wish to program.
If the function you wish to program is located on a function look-up key, press the
appropriate function look-up key, then press 1 to select STATUS PROGRAM (meaning
you wish to program the status of the function not the menu assignment of the function
look-up key) then press the digit corresponding to the function you wish to program.
180 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
#/NS
1. Press the #/NS key to view the #/NS function key options:
#/NS KEY PROG.
DESC1: NOSALE
DESC2: NON ADD #
NO SALE KEY DISABLE
UNDER MGR CONTROL
INHIBIT NO SALE
AFTER NON-ADD #


N
N
N
2. Press CASH from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of #/NS function key options:
#/NS KEY PROG.
ENFORCE# ENTRY AT
START OF SALE
PRINT ON N/S
NON-ADD# PROHIBIT
COMP. NON-ADD# MUST
MATCH MAX DIGIT
MAX DIGIT(0-8)

N
Y
N
N
0
3. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 181
#/NO SALE Function Options
Option
Entry
Description
DESC1
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor for the no sale
function. The default descriptor is NOSALE.
DESC2
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor for the non add #
function. The default descriptor is NON ADD #.
NO SALE KEY
DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable the no sale function (non-add entries are
allowed).
UNDER MGR
CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y to allow operation only in manager operation mode.
INHIBIT NO SALE
AFTER NON-ADD
#
Y or N
Select Y if you want disable the NO SALE function after a
non-add number is entered.
ENFORCE #
ENTRY AT START
OF SALE
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to enforce the entry of a non-add
number at the beginning of each transaction. (For example,
to track the number of customers in each sale, or to identify a
customer number with each sale.)
PRINT ON N/S
Y or N
Select N to stop printing when a NO SALE is performed.
NON-ADD #
PROHIBIT
Y or N
Select Y to disable the non-add # function.
COMP NON-ADD
# MUST MATCH
MAX DIGIT
Y or N
Select Y if you wish all non-add number entries to have the
exact number of digits selected in the MAX DIGIT flag
below.
MAX DIGIT (0-8)
0-8
Enter the maximum number of digits for non-add number
entry. Zero (0) means no limit.
182 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
%1 -%5
1. Press the one of the % keys to view the appropriate % function key options:
%1 PROGRAMMING
DESC : %1
AMOUNT:Y %:N
RATE
KEY DISABLE
UNDER MGR CONTROL
OPEN:Y PRESET:N
SALE:Y
ITEM:N


N
0.000
N
N
N
N
2. Press CASH from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of % function key options:
%1 PROGRAMMING
OVERRRIDEABLE
POS.:Y NEG.:N
TAXABLE BY TAX1
TAXABLE BY TAX2
TAXABLE BY TAX3
TAXABLE BY TAX4
F/S ELIGIBLE

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
3. Press CASH from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the next page of
% function key options:
%1 PROGRAMMING
ALLOW ONLY ONE TIME
SUBTOTAL ENTRY
ALLOW MULTIPLE AMT
DISCOUNT(COUPON)
WITHOUT SUBTOTAL
PRESET OVERIDE IN
MGR ONLY
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20

N
N
N
Program Mode Programming • 183
4. Press CASH from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the last page of
% function key options:
%1 PROGRAMMING
COMPULSORY VALID

N
5. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
%1 -%5 Function Options
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default
descriptors are % 1-4.
AMOUNT:Y %:N
Y or N
Select Y if you wish this key to apply an amount (as in a
coupon). Select N if you wish this key to apply a
percentage (as in a discount or surcharge).
RATE
5 digit
If the function is an amount, enter an amount from 0 to
999.99. If not zero, the amount will be the preset coupon
amount. If the function is a percentage, enter a percentage
from 0 to 99.999%. If not zero, the percentage will be the
preset percentage
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR
CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function
in REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is
allowed only in the X control lock position.
OPEN:Y PRESET:N
Y or N
Select Y if you with the amount or percentage to be entered
by the operator; select N if you with the amount or
percentage to be preset.
SALE:Y ITEM:N
Y or N
Select Y if you wish the amount or percentage to apply to
the sale total. Select N if you wish the amount or
percentage to apply to an item.
OVERRIDEABLE
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to enter a percentage or amount to
override the preset percentage or amount set in the RATE
field.
184 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
POS.:Y NEG.:N
Y or N
Select Y if you wish the amount or percentage to add to the
sale total. Select N if you wish the amount or percentage
to subtract from the sale.
TAXable BY TAX1
Y or N
Select N to tax any taxable items before the discount or
surcharge is applied (tax the gross amount). Select Y to tax
any taxable items after the discount or surcharge is applied
(tax the net amount).
F/S ELIGIBLE
Y or N
Select Y to reduce (increase) the food stamp subtotal by the
amount of % entry.
ALLOW ONLY ONE
TIME SUBTOTAL
ENTRY
Y or N
If Y, you can enter only a single coupon and you must
press the SUBTL key before the coupon entry.
ALLOW MULTIPLE
AMOUNT
DISCOUNT
(COUPON)
WITHOUT
SUBTOTAL ENTRY
Y or N
If you set a % key to be used for vendor coupons (i.e.
amount, negative and sale status) then choose Y to allow
the function to be operated multiple times, without
requiring the SUBTL key to be pressed prior to the coupon
entry.
PRESET OVERRIDE
IN MGR ONLY
Y or N
Select Y to allow preset override only in manager
operation mode.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
TAXable BY TAX2
TAXable BY TAX3
TAXable BY TAX4
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 185
ADD CHECK
1. Press the ADD CHECK key to view the add check function key options:
ADD CHECK PROG.
DESC : ADDCHK
KEY DISABLE
COMPULSORY BEFORE TENDERING


N
N
CONSECUTIVE NUMBER ADVANCED
RECEIPT CONDENCING
Y
N
2. Press CASH from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of add check function key options:
ADD CHECK PROG.
EXEMPT TAX 1
EXEMPT TAX 2
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
COMPULSORY VALID

N
N
N
N
N
3. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
ADD CHECK Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is ADD CHECK.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
COMPULSORY
BEFORE
TENDERING
Y or N
Select Y if you want to force the operator to use the ADD
CHECK function before tendering.
CONSECUTIVE
NUMBERADVANCED
Y or N
Select Y if you want to advance the consecutive number each
time the ADD CHECK key is used.
RCPT
CONDENCING
Y or N
Select Y if you want to delete the preamble and postamble
each time the ADD CHECK key is used.
EXEMPT TAX 1-4
Y or N
Select Y to exempt the appropriate tax automatically when
finalized with this key.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
186 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
CANCEL
1. Press the CANCEL key to view the cancel function key options:
CANCEL KEY PROG.
DESC : CANCEL
KEY HALO
(0 : NO LIMIT)
KEY DISABLE
UNDER MGR CONTROL

0.00
N
N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
CANCEL Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is CANCEL.
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry
limit.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR
CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 187
CASH
1. Press the CASH key to view the cash function key options:
CASH KEY PROG.
DESC : CASH
HALO
(0 : NO LIMIT)
AMOUNT TEND COMPULSORY
OVER/UNDER TENDER
IN MGR CONTROL
DISABLE UNDER TND.


0.00
N
N
N
2. Press CASH from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of cash function key options:
CASH KEY PROG.
DOES DRAWER OPEN
EXEMPT TAX 1
EXEMPT TAX 2
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
COMPULSORY VALID

Y
N
N
N
N
N
3. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
CASH Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha numeric
12 character
7 digit
amount
Y or N
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is CASH.
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be tendered. "0" means that there is no entry limit.
Select Y if you want to force the operator to enter the
tendered amount and let the register calculate the change.
Select Y if you do not want the operator to tender more than
the amount of the sale and issue change. When selected,
over and under tendering is allowed only in the X position.
Select Y if you do not want the operator to tender less than
the amount of the sale.
Select N if you do not want the drawer to opened with this
key.
Select Y to exempt the appropriate tax automatically when
finalized with this key.
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
HALO
AMOUNT TEND
COMP.
OVER/UNDER
TENDER IN MGR
CONTROL
DISABLE UNDER
TEND.
DOES DRAWER
OPEN
EXEMPT TAX 1-4
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Y or N
Y or N
Y or N
Y or N
188 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
CHARGE 1-8
1. Press one of the CHARGE key to view the appropriate charge function key
options:
CHARGE 1 PROG.
DESC : CHARGE1


KEY HALO
0.00
(0 : NO LIMIT)
AMOUNT TEND COMPPULSORY
N
ALLOW OVERTENDERING
IN MANAGER CONTROL MODE ONLY N
DISABLE UNDER TND.
N
2. Press CASH from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of charge function key options:
CHARGE 1 PROG.
DOES DRAWER OPEN
N
ALLOW OVER TEND
NON-ADD # COMPULSORY
EXEMPT TAX 1
EXEMPT TAX 2
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4

N
N
N
N
N
N
3. Press CASH from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the last page of
charge function key options:
CHARGE 1 PROG.

COMPULSORY VALID
N
SEND TO EFT
N
ALLOW UNDERTENDERING
N
IN MANAGER CONTROL MODE ONLY
SELECT (1:CREDIT, 2:DEBIT,
0
3:GIFT, 4:GIFT-NO NSF,
5:CASH BENEFIT)
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 189
4. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
190 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
CHARGE 1-8 Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default
descriptors are CHARGE 1-8.
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be tendered. "0" means that there is no entry limit.
AMOUNT TEND
COMP.
Y or N
Select Y if you want to force the operator to enter the
tendered amount and let the register calculate the change.
ALLOW
OVERTENDERING
IN MANAGER
CONTROL MODE
ONLY
Y or N
NOTE: Option changed at version 1.046 or later. Before
v1.046, this selection controlled both over and under tenders.
When selected, over tendering is allowed only in the X
control lock position.
DISABLE UNDER
TEND.
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator to tender less than
the amount of the sale.
DOES DRAWER
OPEN
Y or N
Select N if you do not want the drawer to opened with this
key.
ALLOW OVER
TEND.
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to allow tender greater than the amount
of the sale.
NON-ADD #
COMP.
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to enforce the entry of a non-add
number prior to tendering.
EXEMPT TAX 1
Y or N
Select Y to exempt the appropriate tax automatically when
finalized with this key.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
CONNECT EFT
Y or N
Select Y if the DataTran is connected.
ALLOW
UNDERTENDERING
IN MANAGER
CONTROL MODE
ONLY
Y or N
NOTE: Option added at version 1.046 or later. Before
v1.046, the selection on page 1 controlled both over and
under tenders. When selected here, under tendering is
allowed only in the X control lock position.
SELECT
(1:CREDIT
2:DEBIT, 3:GIFT,
4: GIFT NSF
5: CASH
BENEFIT)
1, 2, 3, 4
Gift NSF indicates that a Gift card with a value less than the
amount of the sale will be accepted as an under tender.
(Applies to DataTran operations only.) Cash Benefit
function added at version 1.034.
EXEMPT TAX 2
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 191
CHECK CASHING
1. Press the CHECK CASHING key to view the check cashing function key
options:
CHECK CASH PROGRAMMING
DESC : CHKCASH

KEY HALO
0.00
(0 : NO LIMIT)
KEY DISABLE
N
UNDER MGR CONTROL
N
COMPULSORY VALID
N
COMPULSORY CHECK ENDORSEMENT N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
CHECK CASHING Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is CHKCASH.
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry
limit.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR
CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
COMPULSORY
CHECK
ENDORSEMENT
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce check endorsement if an optional printer
with validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
192 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
CHECK ENDORSEMENT
1. Press the CHECK ENDORSEMENT key to view the check endorsement
function key options:
CHECK ENDORSEMENT
DESC : CHKENDOR
KEY DISABLE
PRINT CHECK AMT IN


N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
CHECK ENDORSEMENT Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is CHKENDOR.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
PRINT CHECK
AMT IN THE
ENDORSEMENT
Y or N
Choose Y to print the amount of the check as well as the
endorsement message. Choose N to print only the
endorsement message.
Note: A 10 line check endorsement message may be
programmed. See "Endorsement Message" on page 229 for
more information.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 193
CHECK
1. Press the CHECK key to view the check function key options:
CHECK KEY PROG.
DESC : CHECK
HALO
(0 : NO LIMIT)
AMOUNT TEND COMPULSORY
OVER/UNDER TENDER
IN MGR CONTROL
DISABLE UNDER TENDER


0.00
N
N
N
2. Press CASH from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of check function key options:
CHECK KEY PROG.
DOES DRAWER OPEN
EXEMPT TAX 1
EXEMPT TAX 2
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
COMPULSORY CHECK ENDORSEMENT

N
N
N
N
N
N
3. Press CASH from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the third page of
check function key options:
CHECK KEY PROG.
COMPULSORY VALID

N
4. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
194 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
CHECK Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is CHECK.
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be tendered. "0" means that there is no entry limit.
AMOUNT TEND
COMP.
Y or N
Select Y if you want to force the operator to enter the
tendered amount and let the register calculate the change.
OVER/UNDER
TENDER IN MGR
CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator to tender more than
the amount of the sale and issue change. When selected,
over tendering is allowed only in the X control lock position.
DISABLE UNDER
TEND.
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator to tender less than
the amount of the sale.
DOES DRAWER
OPEN
Y or N
Select N if you do not want the drawer to open with this key.
EXEMPT TAX 1
Y or N
Select Y to exempt the appropriate tax automatically when
finalized with this key.
COMPULSORY
CHECK
ENDORSEMENT
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce check endorsement if an optional
printer with endorsement capability is connected to an RS232C port.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
EXEMPT TAX 2
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 195
CHECK #
1. Press the CHECK TRACK # key to view the check track function key options:
CHECK TRACK PROGRAMMING
DESC : CHECK #
KEY DISABLE
COMPULSORY FOR ALL
SALES
OPENING CLERK HAS
EXCLUSIVE ACCESS
PRINT ON RECEIPT


N
N
N
Y
2. Press CASH from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of check track function key options:
CHECK TRACK PROGRAMMING
PRINT CHKS ON RP
ALLOW ONLY ONE CHK
PER TABLE
CHECK # ASSIGNED
BY REGISTER
DRIVE THRU FEATURE
ENABLED

Y
N
N
N
3. Press CASH from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of check track function key options:
CHECK TRACK PROG.
LENGTH OF CHECK (0-9)
SCAN CHECK #

0
N
4. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
196 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
CHECK # Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is CHKTRACK.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
COMPULSORY
FOR ALL SALES
Y or N
Select Y you must begin a new, or recall an existing tracking
number before registering items.
OPENING CLERK
HAS EXCLUSIVE
ACCESS
Y or N
If Y, the clerk that begins a tracking number is the only clerk
who can recall a check. If N, any clerk can recall any check.
PRINT ON
RECEIPT
Y or N
If N, the check track number and balance will not print on the
receipt.
PRINT ON
REMOTE
Y or N
If N, the check track number and balance will not print on the
remote.
ALLOW ONLY
ONE CHK PER
TABLE
Y or N
If Y, you can begin only one check with the same table #.
CHECK #
ASSIGNED BY
REGISTER
Y or N
If Y, press the CHECK. # key to automatically assign the
next sequential check. Check numbers will begin with #1 and
continue until the open check report is reset, at which point
the check number will be reset and start at #1 again.
DRIVE THRU
FEATURE
ENABLED
Y or N
If you wish to implement a drive thru recall key, this setting
changes the function of the PBAL key to that of a recall key.
Press the PBAL key directly to automatically recall the open
check with the lowest tracking number
LENGTH OF
CHECK (0-9)
Y or N
Set the length of check in number of digits. For example, if 4,
then checks must be used in the range from 1000, to 9999.
This setting applies only to check numbers input by the
operator, not to check numbers assigned by the register.
SCAN CHECK #
Y or N
Choose Y to allow the check number to be input by a scanner
(must be nine digits or less).
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 197
CURRENCY CONVERSION 1-4
1. Press one of the CURRENCY CONVERSION keys to view the appropriate
currency conversion function key options:
CONVERSION #1 PROG.
DESC : CONV1
RATE
NUMBER OF DECIMAL

0
0
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
CURRENCY CONVERSION 1-4 Program Notes
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor for each foreign
currency. The default descriptors are CONV 1-4.
RATE
5 digits
Enter the exchange rate of up to 5 digits (do not enter the
decimal point). See the examples on the next page.
NUMBER OF
DEC.
1-6
Enter a number from 0 to 6 to indicate the decimal position
of the exchange rate. Count the decimal position from the
right. See the examples below.
Currency Exchange Rate Programming Examples
Note: Foreign currency exchange rates can be stated as “foreign currency in dollars”,
or “dollars in foreign currency”. Use the rate stated in “dollars in foreign currency”
when you are programming this section.
The US dollar (home currency) is worth 1.3720 Canadian dollars (foreign currency).
RATE: 13720
NUMBER OF DEC.: 5
The US dollar (home currency) is worth 110.24 Japanese Yen (foreign currency).
RATE: 11024
NUMBER OF DEC.: 2
198 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
EAT-IN
TAKE OUT
DRIVE THRU
1. Press the EAT-IN, TAKE OUT, or DRIVE THRU key to view the appropriate
function key options:
EAT-IN PROGRAMMING
DESC : EATIN
EXEMPT TAX 1
EXEMPT TAX 2
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
COMPULSORY VALID

N
N
N
N
N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
EAT-IN/TAKE OUT/DRIVE THRU Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptors
are EATIN, TAKE OUT and DRIVE THRU.
EXEMPT TAX 1
EXEMPT TAX 2
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
Y or N
If you wish to automatically exempt a tax for a particular type
of sale, select Y for the appropriate tax. For example, if items
are non-taxable for take out, but taxable for eat-in, set this
program to exempt tax on take out sales.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 199
ERROR CORRECT
1. Press the ERROR CORRECT key to view the error correct function key
options:
ERR CORRECT PROGRAMMING
DESC : ERRCORR

KEY HALO
0.00
(0 : NO LIMIT)
KEY DISABLE
N
UNDER MGR CONTROL
N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
ERROR CORRECT Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is ERRCORR.
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry
limit.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR
CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
200 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
FINALIZE
1. Press the FINALIZE key to view the error correct function key options:
ERR CORRECT PROGRAMMING
DESC : FINALIZE
CHARGE POSTING

N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
FINALIZE Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is FINALIZE.
CHARGE
POSTING
Y or N
Choose Y to enable charge posting functions.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 201
F/S TEND
1. Press the F/S TEND key to view the food stamp tender function key options:
FOOD STAMP PROGRAMMING

DESC : F/S TEND

HALO
0.00
EXEMPT TAX 1
N
EXEMPT TAX 2
N
EXEMPT TAX 3
N
EXEMPT TAX 4
N
ALLOW DECIMAL
N
2. Press CASH from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of food stamp tender function key options:
FOOD STAMP PROGRAMMING
CHANGE IS ISSUED IN CASH
DOES DRAWER OPEN
COMPULSORY VALID
ALLOW OVER TEND.
SEND TO EFT

N
Y
N
N
N
3. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
F/S TEND Key Program Notes
Option
DESC
HALO
Entry
Alpha numeric
12 character
7 digit
amount
EXEMPT TAX 1-4
Y or N
ALLOW DECIMAL
Y or N
CHANGE IS
ISSUED IN CASH
DOES DRAWER
OPEN
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
ALLOW OVER TEND
SEND TO EFT
Y or N
Y or N
Y or N
Y or N
Y or N
202 • Program Mode Programming
Description
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is F/S TEND.
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry
limit.
If taxes are exempted automatically on food stamp sales (as is
most often the case) select Y for each tax that is actively used
and needs to be exempted.
If N, food stamp tender must be in whole dollar amounts, i.e.
$1, $5, or $10. If Y, the tender is allowed in any amount.
If Y, food stamp change less than $1 will be issued in cash.
Select N if you do not want the drawer to opened with this
key.
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
Choose Y to allow tendering over the food stamp subtotal.
Option added at version 1.034.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
FUNCTION LOOK UP (1-2)
Two function keys (FUNCTION LOOK 1and FUNCTION LOOK 2) are available to
access up to eight functions each. You can use function look up keys to locate functions that
are necessary for your application, but may not fit on the keyboard layout, or to locate
functions that are used only occasionally.
With this program, you can determine which functions are located on each function look up
key, and you can also access these functions for option programming.
1. Press the FUNCTION LOOK UP 1 or FUNCTION LOOK UP 2 key to view
the appropriate function program menu screen:
FUNC #1 PROGRAM
0. MENU ASSIGNMENT
1. STATUS PROGRAM
2. Press 0 to select the menu assignment on the function look-up key or press 1 to
program the options for a function on the function look-up key. If you are
programming function key options, refer to each function separately in this
chapter to set function options. If you chose 0 to program menu assignment, the
FUNC. # MENU ASSIGN screen displays:
FUNC #1 MENU ASSIGN.
PUSH MENU NUMBER TO
BE PROGRAMMED (1-8)
0
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 203
3. Enter the number of the menu position (there are eight functions listed on each
function look up menu) that you wish to edit, press CASH.
FUNC #1 MENU ASSIGN.
MENU NUMBER :
CURRENT ASSIGNMENT
CANCEL
ENTER NEW FUNC CODE,
PRESS CASH
1
0
4. Type the code for the function you wish to place on the function look up key
menu, press CASH. See "Function Key Codes" in the "Service Mode
Programming" chapter, or press PAGE DOWN to view a list of functions and
codes.
5. Go to step 2 above and continue to program menu numbers for the function look
up key, or press CLEAR to return to the PROGRAM MODE menu.
204 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
GUEST #
1. Press the GUEST key to view the guest function key options:
GUEST # PROGRAMMING
DESC : GUEST
COMPULSORY FOR
GUEST CHECK
COMPULSORY FOR ALL SALES
PRINT AT REMOTE PRINTER

N
N
N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
GUEST Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is GUEST.
COMPULSORY
FOR GUEST
CHECK
Y or N
Select Y to enforce an entry into the GUEST # key before a
tracking number can be accessed for the first time.
COMPULSORY
FOR ALL SALES
Y or N
Select Y to enforce an entry into the GUEST # key before an
item can be registered on any sale.
PRINT AT
REMOTE
PRINTER
Y or N
Select N if you do not want GUEST # entry to print at the
kitchen printer if items from the same transaction are sent to
the KP.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 205
LEVEL 1-5 (Price Level 1-5)
1. Press one of the LEVEL keys to view the level function key options:
LEVEL 1 PROG.
DESC : LEVEL1
SEND DESCRIPTION TO KP

N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
LEVEL 1-5 Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptors
are LEVEL1, LEVEL2, etc.
SEND
DESCRIPTION TO
KP
Y or N
Determines whether the level descriptor prints with the item
at the KP.
206 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
MACRO 1-10
Note: Beginning at version 1.046 you can program a Macro descriptor.
1. Press the FINALIZE key to view the error correct function key options:
MACRO 1PROGRAMMING
DESC : MACRO 1

3. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
FINALIZE Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor for each Macro.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 207
RETURN
1. Press the RETURN key to view the merchandise return function key options:
RETURN KEY PROGAMMING
DESC : MDSE RETURN

KEY HALO
0.00
(0 : NO LIMIT)
KEY DISABLE
N
UNDER MGR CONTROL
N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
RETURN Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is MDSE RETURN.
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry
limit.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR
CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
208 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
MODIFIER 1-5
1. Press one of the MODIFIER keys to view the appropriate modifier function key
options:
MOD 1 PROGAMMING
DESC : MOD1
UNDER MGR CONTROL
AFFECT PLU #
PRINT ON CHECK
PRINT ON RECEIPT
AFFECT DIGIT 1-14
OF PLU#


N
N
N
N
0
2. Press CASH from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of modifier function key options:
MOD 1 PROGAMMING

VALUE OF AFFECTED DIGIT(0-9) 0 
DISPLAY DESCRIPTOR ON LCD
N
3. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 209
MODIFIER 1-5 Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptors
are MOD1 - MOD5.
UNDER MGR
CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
AFFECT PLU #
Y or N
Select Y, if you wish the modifier entry to modify the PLU
and cause a different item/price to be registered. Select N to
only add the modifier descriptor.
PRINT ON CHECK
Y or N
Select N to suppress printing of the modifier descriptor on the
guest check.
PRINT ON
RECEIPT
Y or N
Select N to suppress printing of the modifier descriptor on the
receipt.
AFFECT DIGIT 114
1-14
Preceding a PLU with a Size and/or Modifier key manipulates
the PLU code assigned to the PLU key, causing a different
PLU to be registered when the PLU key is pressed. Enter the
digit of the PLU number you wish to be changed when using
this key. (Digit #1 is the rightmost digit; digit #14 is the
leftmost digit.)
VALUE OF
AFFECTED DIGIT
(0-9)
0-9
Enter the value you wish to be added in the digit position
selected. For example, if you wish to affect PLU digit #4
with a value of 1, then pressing this modifier key prior to the
registration of PLU #17 will result in the registration of PLU
#1017.
SEND
DESCRIPTION TO
KP
Y or N
Determines whether the modifier descriptor prints with the
item at the KP. (The modifier descriptor will print
immediately above the item.)
DISPLAY
DESCRIPTOR ON
LCD
Y or N
Option to display modifier descriptor is available on version
1.046 or later.
210 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
PBAL
1. Press the PBAL key to view the previous balance function key options:
PREVIOUS BAL. PROGRAMMING
DESC : PBAL

ENTER ANY TIME
N
REQUIRE AT START
OF SALE
N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
PBAL Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is PBAL.
ENTER ANY TIME
Y or N
Select Y to allow the PBAL entry at any time. Select N to
allow a PBAL entry only at the start of a sale.
REQUIRE AT
START OF SALE
Y or N
Select Y to require an entry into the PBAL key at the start of
every transaction.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 211
PAID OUT 1-3
1. Press one of the PAID OUT keys to view the paid out function key options:
PO #1 KEY PROGRAMMING
DESC : PO1

KEY HALO
0.00
(0 : NO LIMIT)
KEY DISABLE
N
UNDER MGR CONTROL
N
COMPULSORY VALID
N
DISABLE TIP INPUT
N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
PAID OUT 1-3 Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptors
are PO 1-3.
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry
limit.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR
CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
DISABLE TIP
INPUT
Y or N
Option available at firmware version 1.038 or later.
212 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
PRINT CHECK
1. Press the PRINT CHECK key to view the print check function key options:
PRINT CHECK PROGRAMMING
DESC : PRINT CHECK
CHECK PRINT
COM PORT #(0-4)
AUTO SERVICE CHK
PRT CHECK ON RECP
SKIP PRT OF CONSEC#
ON CHECK

0
N
N
N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
PRINT CHECK Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is PRINT CHECK.
CHECK PRINT
COMM PORT # (02)
0-2
Select the port (1 or 2) where the check print printer is
attached. If 0 is selected, the check will print on the receipt
printer.
AUTO SERVICE
CHK
Y or N
Select Y if you want the Check Print function to
automatically service the check.
PRT CHECK ON
RECP
Y or N
Select Y if you want the Check Print function to print on the
receipt printer.
SKIP PRT OF
CONSEC# ON
CHECK
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to delete the printing of the consecutive
# on the guest check.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 213
PROMO
1. Press the PROMO key to view the promotion function key options:
PROMO PROGRAMMING
DESC : PROMO
KEY DISABLE
UNDER MGR CONTROL
TAXABLE BY TAX1
TAXABLE BY TAX2
TAXABLE BY TAX3
TAXABLE BY TAX4

N
N
N
N
N
N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
PROMO Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is PROMO.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR
CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
TAXABLE BY
TAX1
TAXABLE BY
TAX2
TAXABLE BY
TAX3
TAXABLE BY
TAX4
Y or N
If an item is taxable, and you wish to remove taxes and an
item's cost when using the PROMO key, set the taxable status
for the appropriate tax to Y.
214 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
RECD ON ACCT 1-3
1. Press one of the RECD ON ACCT keys to view the received on account
function key options:
RA #1 KEY PROGRAMMING
DESC : RA1

KEY HALO
0.00
(0 : NO LIMIT)
KEY DISABLE
N
UNDER MGR CONTROL
N
COMPULSORY VALID
N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
RECD ON ACCT 1-3 Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptors
are RA 1-3.
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry
limit.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR
CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 215
SCALE
1. Press the SCALE key to view the scale function key options:
SCALE KEY PROGRAMMING
DESC : SCALE
KEY DISABLE
UNDER MGR CONTROL
KEY IS MAN. ENTRY
TARE-WEIGHT COMP.
WEIGHT SYM FOR MAN.
(0:LB 1:KG 2:OZ)


N
N
N
N
0
2. Press CASH from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of scale function key options:
SCALE KEY PROG.
ALLOW DOLLAR ENTRY
W/O SCALE ON
SCALEABLE ITEM

N
3. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
SCALE Key Program Notes
Option
DESC
KEY DISABLE
UNDER MGR
CONTROL
Entry
Alpha numeric
12 character
Y or N
Y or N
KEY IS MAN. ENTRY Y or N
TARE-WEIGHT
COMP.
WEIGHT SYMBOL
FOR MAN
ALLOW DOLLAR
ENTRY W/O SCALE
ON SCALEABLE ITEM
Y or N
Y or N
Y or N
216 • Program Mode Programming
Description
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is SCALE.
Select Y to disable this function.
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
Select Y if you wish to scale key to enter a manual weight.
Select N if you wish to automatically recall the weight from
the attached scale.
Select Y if you wish to enforce the subtraction of a tare
weight on the scale entry.
Select Y if you wish to use the weight symbol Kg (kilogram)
for weights entered manually or OZ for ounce measurements.
If N, you must use the scale to register scaleable PLU items.
If Y, you can either register scaleable items by weight
extension, or by price entry.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
SERVICE
1. Press the SERVICE key to view the service function key options:
SERVICE KEY PROGRAMMING

DESC : SERVICE

NON-ADD # COMP
N
PRINT ON RECEIPT
Y
NEGATIVE BALANCE
IN MGR CONTROL
N
CALCULATE TAX1
Y
CALCULATE TAX2
Y
2. Press CASH from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of service function key options:
SERVICE KEY PROGRAMMING
CALCULATE TAX3
CALCULATE TAX4
COMPULSORY VALID
HARD CHECK PRINTER
PORT(0-4)

Y
Y
N
0
3. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
SERVICE Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha numeric
12 character
Y or N
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is SERVICE.
Select Y if you wish to force the entry of a non-add number
(i.e. a tax exempt #) before the key is used
Select N to not print on the receipt.
NON-ADD #
COMP
PRINT ON
RECEIPT
NEGATIVE
BALANCE IN
MGR CONTROL
CALCULATE TAX1-4
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
HARD CHECK
PRINTER PORT
(0-4)
Y or N
Y or N
Y or N
Y or N
0-2
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
Select Y to calculate and add the appropriate tax
automatically when finalized with this key.
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
If you are using a hard check system, enter the RS232C port
number (1 or 2) where the optional guest check printer is
attached.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 217
TABLE
1. Press the TABLE key to view the table # function key options:
TABLE # PROGRAMMING
DESC : TABLE
ENFORCE ON CHECK
TRACK
ENFORCE ON ALL
SALES
PRINT AT REMOTE
PRINTER

N
N
N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
TABLE Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is TABLE.
ENFORCE ON
CHECK TRACK
Y or N
If Y, you must enter the table number before opening a new
check track #.
ENFORCE ON
ALL SALES
Y or N
If Y, you must enter the table number before beginning any
transaction.
PRINT AT
REMOTE
PRINTER
Y or N
Choose Y to print the table number at the remote printer.
218 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
TARE
1. Press the TARE key to view the Tare function key options:
TARE KEY PROGRAMMING
DESC : TARE
KEY DISABLE
UNDER MGR CONTROL
#5 IS MANUAL TARE

N
N
N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
TARE Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is TARE.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR
CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
#5 IS MANUAL
TARE
Y or N
Choose Y to use tare number five to manually enter a tare
weight.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 219
TAX EXEMPT
1. Press the TAX EXEMPT key to view the tax exempt function key options:
TAX EXEMPT PROGRAMMING
DESC : TAXEXMT
EXEMPT TAX 1
EXEMPT TAX 2
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
NON-ADD# COMP
COMPULSORY VALID

N
N
N
N
N
N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
TAX EXEMPT Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is TAXEXMT.
EXEMPT TAX 1
EXEMPT TAX 2
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
Y or N
Select Y or N for each tax to determine which tax or taxes are
exempted when this key is used.
NON-ADD #
COMP
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to force the entry of a non-add number
(i.e. a tax exempt #) before the key is used.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
220 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
TIME IN/OUT
1. Press the TIME IN/OUT key to view the time in/out function key options:
TIME IN/OUT PROGRAMMING
DESC : TIME IN/OUT
KEY DISABLE
UNDER MGR CONTROL
COMPULSORY VALID

N
N
N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
TIME IN/OUT Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is
TIME IN/OUT.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR
CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 221
TIP
1. Press the TIP key to view the tip function key options:
TIP KEY PROGRAMMING
DESC : TIP
KEY DISABLE
UNDER MGR CONTROL
TYPE IS
%:1 AMOUNT:0
ADD TAX RATE 1
ADD TAX RATE 2


N
N
0
N
N
2. Press CASH from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of tip function key options:
TIP KEY PROG.
ADD TAX RATE 3
ADD TAX RATE 4
AMT ADDED TO
NET & GROSS TOT

N
N
N
3. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
TIP Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is TIP.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
TYPE IS
%:1 AMOUNT:0
0 or 1
Select 0 if the tip is to be a calculated percentage based on a
percentage entry. Select 1 if the TIP is to be an amount entry.
ADD TAX RATE 1
ADD TAX RATE 2
ADD TAX RATE 3
ADD TAX RATE 4
Y or N
Choose Y to if tax is calculated and added on the tip amount.
AMT ADDED TO
NET AND GROSS
TOT
Y or N
Choose Y if you wish to add the TIP total to the NET and
GROSS sales totals on the financial report.
222 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
VALIDATE
1. Press the VALIDATE key to view the validate function key options:
VALID KEY PROGRAMMING
DESC : VALIDATION
SLIP OUTPUT
COM PORT #(0-4)
KEY DISABLE

0
N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
VALIDATE Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is VALIDATION.
SLIP OUTPUT
COMM PORT #
(0-4)
0-4
If validation is used, identify the communications port (1-4)
where the validating printer is attached. Enter 0 if validation
is not used.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
ALLOW
MULTIPLE
VALID?
Y or N
Select Y to allow multiple validations of the same transaction.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 223
VOID ITEM
1. Press the VOID ITEM key to view the void item function key options:
VOID KEY PROGRAMMING
DESC : VOID

KEY HALO
0.00
(0 : NO LIMIT)
KEY DISABLE
N
UNDER MGR CONTROL
N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
VOID ITEM Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is VOID.
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry
limit.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR
CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
224 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
WASTE
1. Press the WASTE key to view the waste function key options:
WASTE PROGRAMMING
DESC : WASTE

KEY HALO
0.00
(0 : NO LIMIT)
KEY DISABLE
N
UNDER MGR CONTROL
N
COMPULSORY VALID
N
2. Press CASH from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
WASTE Key Program Notes
Option
Entry
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12 character
You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
is WASTE.
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry
limit.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR
CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 225
Logo Descriptor
 From the PGM control lock position menu, press 7 for LOGO DESC. The
LOGO DESC. PROGRAM screen displays:
LOGO DESC. PROGRAM
0.PREAMBLE
1.POSTAMBLE
2.ENDORSEMENT MESSAGE
3.FINANCIAL REPORT
4.CLERK REPORT
5.MIX & MATCH NAME
6.DATATRAN
Preamble
The preamble is a programming message of up to six lines of 32 characters that appears at the
top of each receipt and/or guest check.
1. From the LOGO DESC. PROGRAM screen, press 0 to display the
PREAMBLE screen:
PREAMBLE

LINE 1 :

LINE 2 :
LINE 3 :
2. Using the alpha numeric keyboard overlay (SPS-320/SPS-340, type the
descriptor. For the SPS-345 use the descriptor code method (see page 117.)
Each line can be up to 32 characters. If you make a mistake, press the
BACKSPACE key (on the alpha overlay or enter the backspace code 97 if you
are using the descriptor code method) to erase the previous character. After you
have completed typing the first line, press CASH to accept the new line and
advance to the second line, or press CLEAR to return to the LOGO DESC.
PROGRAM screen without making any changes.
226 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
3. Using the same procedure, continue programming each line as necessary. Press
CLEAR at any time to exit. After programming the third line, the fourth, fifth,
and sixth lines display:
PREAMBLE

LINE 4 :

LINE 5 :
LINE 6 :
4. When the last line has been entered, press CASH to accept the line and return to
the LOGO DESC. PROGRAM screen.
Postamble
The postamble is a programming message of up to six lines of 32 characters that appears at
the bottom of each receipt and/or guest check.
1. From the LOGO DESC. PROGRAM screen, press 0 to display the
POSTAMBLE screen:
POSTAMBLE

LINE 1 :

LINE 2 :
LINE 3 :
2. Using the alpha numeric keyboard overlay (SPS-320/SPS-340, type the
descriptor. For the SPS-345 use the descriptor code method (see page 117.)
Each line can be up to 32 characters. If you make a mistake, press the
BACKSPACE key (on the alpha overlay or enter the backspace code 97 if you
are using the descriptor code method) to erase the previous character. After you
have completed typing the first line, press CASH to accept the new line and
advance to the second line, or press CLEAR to return to the LOGO DESC.
PROGRAM screen without making any changes.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 227
3. Using the same procedure, continue programming each line as necessary. Press
CLEAR at any time to exit. After programming the third line, the fourth, fifth
and sixth lines display:
POSTAMBLE

LINE 4 :

LINE 5 :
LINE 6 :
4. When the last line has been entered, press CASH to accept the line and return to
the LOGO DESC. PROGRAM screen.
228 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Endorsement Message
The Endorsement Message is a programming message of up to ten lines of 32 characters that
prints when a check is endorsed on an optional slip printer.
1. From the LOGO DESC. PROGRAM screen, press 2 to display the
ENDORSEMENT MESG. Screen:
ENDORSEMENT MESSAGE
LINE 1 :


LINE 2 :
LINE 3 :
2. Using the alpha numeric keyboard overlay (SPS-320/SPS-340, type the
descriptor. For the SPS-345 use the descriptor code method (see page 117.)
Each line can be up to 32 characters. If you make a mistake, press the
BACKSPACE key (on the alpha overlay or enter the backspace code 97 if you
are using the descriptor code method) to erase the previous character. After you
have completed typing the first line, press CASH to accept the new message and
advance to the second line, or press CLEAR to return to the LOGO DESC.
PROGRAM screen without making any changes.
3. Using the same procedure, continue programming each line as necessary. Press
CLEAR at any time to exit. After programming the third line, the next three
lines display:
ENDORSEMENT MESSAGE
LINE 4 :


LINE 5 :
LINE 6 :
4. Continue programming all ten lines if necessary. When the last line has been
entered, press CASH to accept the message and return to the LOGO DESC.
PROGRAM screen.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 229
Financial Report
The Financial Report selection allows you to reprogram the descriptors that appear with the
Financial Report totals and counters. For example, the first total on the financial report
"+PLU TTL" represents the total of all positive PLU entries. You might wish to re-label this
total to say "FOOD SALES". You can reprogram any of the Financial Report totals listed
here with any 12-character descriptor.
1. From the LOGO DESC. PROGRAM screen, press 3 to display the
FINANCIAL REP MESG. Screen:
FINANCIAL REP MESSAGE
TTL 1 :
+PLU TTL
TTL 2 :
-PLU TTL
TTL 3 :
ADJST TTL


2. The first 3 report descriptors (TTLs 1-3) display with the cursor arrow pointing at
the first descriptor. Using the alpha numeric keyboard overlay (SPS-320/SPS340, type the descriptor. For the SPS-345 use the descriptor code method (see
page 117.) Each descriptor can be up to 12 characters. If you make a mistake,
press the BACKSPACE key (on the alpha overlay or enter the backspace code
97 if you are using the descriptor code method) to erase the previous character.
After you have completed typing the first descriptor, press CASH to accept the
new message and advance to the next descriptor, or press CLEAR to return to
the LOGO DESC. PROGRAM screen without making any changes.
3. Press CASH repeatedly, or press PAGE UP and/or PAGE DOWN to locate the
descriptor you wish to program. After the last item on each screen, the screen
shifts to display the next 3 descriptors. (There are 73 Financial Report
descriptors that you may program.) Using the same procedure, continue
programming each line as necessary. Press CLEAR at any time to exit and
return to the LOGO DESC. PROGRAM screen.
230 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Clerk Report
The Clerk Report selection allows you to reprogram the descriptors that appear with the Clerk
Report totals and counters. For example, the first total on the clerk report "NET SALES"
might be re-labeled to say "GROSS SALES". You can reprogram any of the Financial Report
totals listed here with any 12-character descriptor.
1. From the LOGO DESC. PROGRAM screen, press 4 to display the CLERK
REP MESG. Screen:
CLERK REP MESSAGE
TTL 1 :
NET SALE
TTL 2 :
NONTAX
TTL 3 :
TAX1 SALES


2. The first 3 report descriptors (TTLs 1-3) display with the cursor arrow pointing at
the first descriptor. Using the alpha numeric keyboard overlay (SPS-320/SPS340, type the descriptor. For the SPS-345 use the descriptor code method (see
page 117.) Each descriptor can be up to 12 characters. If you make a mistake,
press the BACKSPACE key (on the alpha overlay or enter the backspace code
97 if you are using the descriptor code method) to erase the previous character.
After you have completed typing the first descriptor, press CASH to accept the
new message and advance to the next descriptor, or press CLEAR to return to
the LOGO DESC. PROGRAM screen without making any changes.
3. Press CASH repeatedly, or press PAGE UP and/or PAGE DOWN to locate the
descriptor you wish to program. After the last item on each screen, the screen
shifts to display the next 3 descriptors. (There are 52 Clerk Report descriptors
that you can program.) Using the same procedure, continue programming each
descriptor as necessary. Press CLEAR at any time to exit and return to the
LOGO DESC. PROGRAM screen.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 231
Mix & Match Name
Each Mix & Match discount function can be programmed with a unique 12-character
descriptor. The number of Mix & Match discounts is set in memory allocation. See “Mix &
Match Program” on page 106 for more information.
1. From the LOGO DESC. PROGRAM screen, press 5 to display the MIX &
MATCH DESC. Screen:
M
M
M
M
M
M
&
&
&
&
&
&
M
M
M
M
M
M
MIX & MATCH DESC.
1 :
1
2 :
2
3 :
3


2. Using the alpha numeric keyboard overlay (SPS-320/SPS-340, type the
descriptor. For the SPS-345 use the descriptor code method (see page 117.)
Each descriptor can be up to 12 characters. If you make a mistake, press the
BACKSPACE key (on the alpha overlay or enter the backspace code 97 if you
are using the descriptor code method) to erase the previous character. After you
have completed typing the first descriptor, press CASH to accept the new
message and advance to the next descriptor or press CLEAR to return to the
LOGO DESC. PROGRAM screen without making any changes.
3. Press CASH repeatedly, or press PAGE UP and/or PAGE DOWN to locate the
next mix & match descriptor you wish to program. After the last item on each
screen, the screen shifts to display the next 3 mix & match descriptors. Using the
same procedure, continue programming each line as necessary. Press CLEAR at
any time to exit and return to the LOGO DESC. PROGRAM screen.
232 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
DataTran
When a DataTran integrated payment appliance is connected, you can print a message of up
to four lines on the electronic payment draft receipt.
1. From the LOGO DESC. PROGRAM screen, press 6 to display the
DATATRAN MESSAGE screen:
DATATRAN MESSAGE

LINE 1 :

LINE 2 :
LINE 3 :
2. Using the alpha numeric keyboard overlay (SPS-320/SPS-340, type the
descriptor. For the SPS-345 use the descriptor code method (see page 117.)
Each line can contain up to 32 characters. If you make a mistake, press the
BACKSPACE key (on the alpha overlay or enter the backspace code 97 if you
are using the descriptor code method) to erase the previous character. After you
have completed typing the first line, press CASH to accept the new message and
advance to the next line, or press CLEAR to return to the LOGO DESC.
PROGRAM screen without making any changes.
3. Press CASH repeatedly, or press PAGE UP and/or PAGE DOWN to locate the
next line of the message you wish to program. After the last line on the first
page, the screen shifts to display line #4 of the message. Using the same
procedure, continue programming each line as necessary. Press CLEAR at any
time to exit and return to the LOGO DESC. PROGRAM screen.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 233
NLU Code Number
NLUs are fixed keys on the keyboard (like traditional department keys) that access specific
PLUs.
On the default keyboard the PLU# assigned to the NLU key is the same, i.e. NLU key
number one is PLU #1. However, with this program, you can assign any PLU number you
wish to any one of the NLU keys.
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 8 for NLU CODE# PGM.
The NLU CODE PROGRAM screen displays:
NLU CODE PROGRAM
PRESS THE NLU KEY ON THE
KEYBOARD YOU WISH TO PROGRAM
PRESS CLEAR TO EXIT
2. Press the NLU key on the keyboard you wish to program, or press CLEAR to
exit.
NLU CODE PROGRAM
CURRENT PLU CODE#
1
ENTER
NEW PLU CODE#
0
3. The current PLU code number displays. Type the new PLU code number you
wish to use for this NLU key, press CASH.
4. The NLU CODE PROGRAM screen returns. Continue from step 2 to program
additional NLU keys, or press CLEAR to exit.
234 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Download Programs
When multiple registers are connected in an IRC network, you can download programs from
one register to any or all of the remaining registers.
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 9 for DOWNLOAD
PROGRAMS. The PROGRAM DOWN screen displays:
PROGRAM DOWN
0. IRC ALL
1. IRC SELECT
2. From the PROGRAM DOWN screen, press 0 if you with to download programs
to all of the registers, then go to step 4. If you wish to download only to selected
registers, press 1:
PROGRAM DOWN
0.IRC ALL
1.IRC SELECT
#
1Y  2N 3N 4N 5N 6N 7N 8N
3. If you pressed 1 to download to selected registers, the PROGRAM DOWN
screen now displays Y or N for each of the eight possible registers in an IRC
system. For example, if your IRC system consists of 3 registers, the default Y
will display for register 1, 2, and 3. The cursor arrow points at the first register.
Press the YES/NO key to toggle the selection for register #1 to Y or N. Press
CASH. The cursor arrow moves to #2. Select Y or N for second register. In this
manner you can determine which registers you wish to download programs to.
When you have selected Y or N for the last register, the PROGRAM DOWN
screen appears.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 235
PROGRAM DOWN
0.PLU
1.GROUP
2.SALES TAX
3.SYSTEM OPTION
4.PRINT OPTION
5.FUNCTION KEYS
6.CLERK

4. From the PROGRAM DOWN screen, find the digit that represents the program
you wish to download. Press PAGE DOWN to view the second page of the
PROGRAM DOWN options. Note that 00 downloads all programs.
PROGRAM DOWN
7.LOGO DESC.
8.NLU CODE# PGM.
9.TIME & DATE/MISC
00.ALL

5. Press the digit that represents your selection. This display will indicate the
number of the machine that the program is downloading to. The printer at the
receiving register will indicate "PROGRAM DOWN" and "PASS" or "FAIL" to
indicate if the download is successful.
Note: If there is a failure in IRC communication, the register that programs are being
sent from will display "IRC NOT READY" and the register number indicating no
communication is possible.
236 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Clerk In/Out
The Clerk In/Out program allows you to edit actual punch in/out times for the day.
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The
PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen displays.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press 0 for CLERK I/O. The
CLERK NUMBER screen displays:
CLERK NUMBER
CLERK NO? (1-10)
0
3. Type the number of the clerk you wish to edit and press CASH to display the
CLERK I/O PROG. screen:
CLERK
IN 00.00.00 
OUT 00.00.00
IN 00.00.00
OUT 00.00.00
IN 00.00.00
OUT 00.00.00
TIME WORKED:
I/O PROG.
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
4. The cursor will point at the date for the first time punch. Press CASH until the
cursor points at the field you wish to edit. Note that you can edit the last 20 time
punches, although only 6 dates/times display on the screen at one time. When
you leave the last field displayed on the current screen, your view will shift to the
next 6 dates/times

If you wish to edit a date, type a new date and press CASH. Be sure to enter
the date in a six digit format, i.e. enter July 8th, 2011 as 070811.

If you wish to edit a time field, type the new time in a 24 hour (military)
format, i.e. enter 7:00 PM as 1900.
5. Note that when you edit time information, the TIME WORKED field is updated
with a new total. When you have completed editing, press CLEAR to return to
the CLERK NUMBER selection screen.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 237
PLU Stock
If you designate a PLU as an inventory item (see PLU programming) then a special PLU
stock counter keeps a running inventory count. This program is where you can set the current
inventory level.

Refer to "System Option Programming" on page 160 to determine whether the
quantity of inventory you enter in this program adds to existing inventory
quantity, or whether it replaces the current inventory quantity.

Inventory is kept in decimal units two digits beyond the decimal. For example,
if 1.75 pounds are multiplied times the PLU with the preset price per pound of
apples, 1.75 is subtracted from the PLU representing apples.
To Program Inventory
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The
PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen displays.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press 1 for PLU STOCK. The
PLU NUMBER screen displays:
PLU NUMBER
 ENTER PLU NUMBER
AND PUSH PLU, OR
 PRESS A PLU KEY ON
THE KEYBOARD
0
3. Enter the PLU number and press the PLU key, or press an PLU key on the
keyboard. The stock quantity for the selected PLU displays:
PLU#
STOCK QUANTITY
1 P1
0.00 
238 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
4. Type the new or additional stock quantity and press CASH. Note that stock is
kept in decimal units and you must enter new or additional stock to two digits
beyond the decimal. For example, type 1 0 0 0 to enter ten units of inventory.
5. Return to step 2 to continue recording inventory, or press CLEAR to return to
the PROGRAM MODE menu.
Drawer Limit
You can set a limit for the drawer total. When cash in drawer exceeds the limit you program
here, a warning will display on the screen. You must press CLEAR to remove the warning
and continue operations. The warning will continue to appear at the completion of every
transaction with the limit exceeded, until you use the PAID OUT function to remove cash
from the drawer.
Set the drawer limit to 0 to disable the drawer limit warning.
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The
PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen displays.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press 2 for DRAWER LIMIT.
The LIMIT PROGRAM screen displays:
LIMIT PROGRAM
DRAWER LIMIT
0.00 
3. Type the amount you wish to use for a limit (or type 0 for no limit.) Press
CASH.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 239
Check Change Limit
Use this program to set the maximum amount of cash that can be returned when a check is
tendered for an amount greater than the amount of the sale. For example, if the check change
limit is $10.00 the maximum amount that can be tendered into the check key on a $5.00 sale
is $15.00.
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The
PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen displays.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press 3 for CHECK CHANGE
LIMIT. The CHECK LIMIT PGM. screen displays:
CHECK LIMIT PROGRAM
CHECK CHANGE LIMIT
0.00 
3. Type the amount for the check change limit. Press CASH.
240 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Time & Date
Use this program to set the clock and calendar on your SPS-300. The date changes
automatically. After initial setting, time changing will probably be required only for
beginning and ending daylight savings time.
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The
PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen displays.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press 4 for TIME & DATE. The
SET DATE & TIME screen displays:
SET DATE & TIME
SET TIME :
(MILITARY)
SET DATE :
HH:MM
09:01 
MM.DD.YY
09.21.11
3. Type the current time in 24-hour format (i.e. military time, where 13:00 is 1:00
PM.) Press CASH.
4. Type the current date in MM (month) DD (day) and YY (year) format. Press
CASH.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 241
Tare Weight
A tare is the amount of weight representing the container, or package when items are sold by
weight. You can pre-program five tare weights, representing the weight of different
containers. When you place an item and a container on an optional scale, you can enter the
tare number to automatically subtract the pre-programmed tare weight.
(Note: If your scale is reading pounds, enter the tare in pounds; if your scale is reading
ounces, enter the tare in ounces. The last tare digit must be zero. Enter the tare without
pressing the decimal key. For example if the tare is 1.15 lbs, enter 1150; if the tare is .09 lbs,
enter 0090.)
If you choose to use tare #5 for manual tare weight entry, do not enter a weight for tare #5.
(See TARE on page 219.)
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The
PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen displays.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press 5 for TARE WEIGHT.
The TARE WEIGHT PROG. screen displays with the cursor arrow pointed at
the weight for tare #1:
TARE WEIGHT PROGRAM
TARE
TARE
TARE
TARE
TARE
1
2
3
4
5
:
:
:
:
:
0.000 
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
3. Type the weight for the first tare, press CASH. The cursor advances to TARE 2.
Type the weight for the second tare and press CASH. Continue until all 5 tares
are programmed, or press CLEAR to exit.
242 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Macro
Macro keys may be programmed to record, and then later perform, up to 50 keystrokes. For
example, a macro key could be set to tender (preset tender) a common currency, such as $5 into
the cash key. Use this program to record keystrokes for each of the 10 possible macro keys.
Note: You can also program macro names in function key programming.
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The
PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen displays.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press 6 for MACRO. The
MACRO PROGRAM screen displays:
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
MACRO
MACRO
MACRO
MACRO
MACRO
MACRO
MACRO
MACRO PROGRAM
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7

3. Press the digit that represents the macro you wish to program. Press PAGE
DOWN to view the remainder of the list:
MACRO PROGRAM
7. MACRO #8
8. MACRO #9
9. MACRO #10
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20

Program Mode Programming • 243
Programming a New Macro
1. After selecting a new macro to program, the screens displays with the arrow
pointing at the first macro line:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

2. Press the first key of the macro sequence, for example, press 1 (numeric one):
1. ONE
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

3. The keystroke is recorded on the screen and the cursor moves to the next
keystroke.
244 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
4. Continue to enter keystrokes until the macro is complete. Press CLEAR to end
the macro recording and return to the MACRO PROGRAM screen. If you wish
to add a function to a macro that is not located on the keyboard, or if you wish to
include the CLEAR, Y/N, PAGE UP, or PAGE DOWN function to a macro
string (these keys are used for editing purposes inside this program), press PAGE
DOWN to display a key code list:
FUNCTION
KEYCODE
------------------------------NLU#1 - NLU#150(1-150)
ONE
301
TWO
302
THREE
303
FOUR
304
FIVE
305
5. With the key code list displayed, press PAGE DOWN and PAGE UP to find the
function you wish to add to the macro. Type the numeric code number press
CASH. The function is added to the macro.
Editing an Existing Macro
1. After selecting a macro to program the screen displays the keystrokes currently
programmed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
ONE
TWO
THREE
FOUR

2. Press the YES/NO key to advance the cursor to the line you wish to edit.
3. With the cursor pointing at a line, press (or select) the new function you wish to
place in the macro sequence.
4. If you wish to remove a key stroke from a macro, replace the current function
with the INACTIVE function by pressing the PAGE DOWN to display a key
code list, then enter
4 4 5.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 245
Machine No.
The machine number is printed on the register receipt. Program a machine number so that
any receipt can be identified with the store or register where the transaction took place. The
machine number may be a different number than the IRC register number programmed in
IRC programming (see "IRC Options" in the "Service Mode Programming" chapter.)
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The
PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen displays. Press PAGE DOWN to view the
remainder of the page 2 program options.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press 7 for MACHINE NO. The
MACHINE # PROG. screen displays:
MACHINE # PROGRAM
MACHINE #
0
3. Type the machine number, up to 5 digits, press CASH.
Training Mode Password
If you wish to use training mode, you must program a password that you will use to enter
training mode. The password may be up to 4 digits long, however, if you choose to use a
password less that for digits, you must enter preceding zeros to complete a 4 digit entry. For
example, if you program the password to be "77", you must type "0077" when entering
training.
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The
PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen displays. Press PAGE DOWN to view the
remainder of the page 2 program options.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press 9 for TRAINING MODE
P/W. The TRAINING MODE P/W screen displays:
TRAINING MODE PASSWORD
PASSWORD :
0
3. Type the password, up to 4 digits, press CASH.
246 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Level Activate Time
Price levels can be automatically activated at specific times. (This function was added at
version 1.050.) Use this program to select the time for each level to activate. Set the time in
24-hour format (military time, i.e. 1300-1pm). You must also set the System Option “Price
Level is” to “Staydown”. This option is found on page 13 of System Options.
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The
PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen displays. Press PAGE DOWN to view the
remainder of the page 2 program options.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press DEC (the decimal point
key) for LEVEL ACTIVATE TIME. The LEVEL ACTIVATE TIME
PROGRAM screen displays:
LEVEL ACTIVATE TIME PROGRAM
(MILITARY
FROM
TO
USE
LEVEL1
00:00  00:00
N
LEVEL2
00:00
00:00
N
LEVEL3
00:00
00:00
N
LEVEL4
00:00
00:00
N
LEVEL5
00:00
00:00
N
3. Set the active times for each level and set to Y(yes) if the level is used.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Program Mode Programming • 247
Program Scans
You can make a printed record of your SPS-300 program.
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The
PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen displays. Press PAGE DOWN to view the
remainder of the page 2 program options.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press 00 for SCAN. The
PROGRAM SCAN screen displays:
PROGRAM SCAN
0. PROGRAM SCAN
1. ALL PROGRAM SCAN
3. Press 1 to initiate a printout of all programs. Press 0 to select the program you
wish to print from the PROGRAM SCAN screen.
PROGRAM SCAN
P1 
0.PLU
1.GROUP
2.SALES TAX
3.SYSTEM OPTION
4.PRINT OPTION
5.FUNCTION KEYS
6.CLERK
4. Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the program scan selections. If
you see the program you wish to print, press the digit representing that program.
PROGRAM SCAN
7.LOGO DESC.
8.NLU CODE# PROGRAM
P2 
00.MORE SCAN
248 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
5. Press 00 to view the PROGRAM SCAN page 2 screen:
PROGRAM SCAN
0.CLERK I/O
1.PLU STOCK
2.DRAWER LIMIT
3.CHECK CHANGE LIMIT
4.TIME & DATE
5.TARE WEIGHT
6.MACRO
P1 
6. Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the program scan selections.
When you see the program you wish to print, press the digit representing that
program.
PROGRAM MODE
7.MACHINE NO.
8.PC SCHEDULE
9.TRAINING MODE P/W
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
P2 
Program Mode Programming • 249
Sample Reports
Financial
DATE 11/10/2011 WED
Total and count of
all positive PLUs
TIME 13:32
X 1
REPORT
00001
-------------------------------FINANCIAL
+PLU TTL
Total and count of
all Negative PLUs
Total of +PLU and
–PLU sales
Total of Nontaxable sales
Total of tax eligible
sales for each sale
tax
Total of tax
collected for each
tax
Total exempted
sales for each tax
Total sales for each
type of destination
Total and count for
each % function key
(i.e. discounts &
coupons)
179.56
$288.60
-PLU TTL
10
-20.00
ADJST TTL
189.56
$268.60
-------------------------------NONTAX
$30.47
TAX1 SALES
$153.60
TAX2 SALES
$11.92
TAX3 SALES
$16.77
TAX4 SALES
$31.89
TAX1
$10.00
TAX2
$1.21
TAX3
$1.18
TAX4
$2.18
XMPT1 SALES
$7.00
XMPT2 SALES
$1.50
XMPT3 SALES
$7.95
XMPT4 SALES
$7.50
EATIN TTL
1
$10.12
TAKEOUT TTL
2
$40.77
DRTHRU TTL
1
$3.04
ITEM DISC.
3
-0.48
continued . . .
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Sample Reports • 251
continued from previous page
Total and count for
each % function key
(i.e. discounts &
coupons)
SALE DISC.
SALE SURCH.
% 4
% 5
Net Sales
NET SALE
Credited tax for
each tax. (Tax is
credited for negative
taxable sales, i.e.
mdse return
transactions.)
CREDIT TAX1
CREDIT TAX2
CREDIT TAX3
CREDIT TAX4
Food stamp change
credited to sales
FD/S CREDIT
RETURN
Total and count for
each type of
transaction
correction.
ERROR CORR
PREVIOUS VD
MODE VOID
CANCEL
Gross Sales
Totals and counters
for CASH and
CHECK sales
GROSS SALES
CASH SALES
CHECK SALES
R/A 1
R/A 2
R/A 3
Total and count for
each type R/A
(received on
account) and P/O
(paid out) key.
P/O 1
P/O 2
P/O 3
2
-5.22
3
$3.23
0
$0.00
0
$0.00
26
$281.18
4
-1.11
1
-0.23
2
-0.89
1
-0.39
0
$0.23
33
-59.73
2
-4.00
1
-1.50
-2
-6.40
2
$16.00
$375.63
13
$133.49
1
$23.05
1
$145.00
0
$0.00
0
$0.00
1
-140.00
0
$0.00
0
$0.00
continued . . .
252 • Sample Reports
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Total and count of
items sold with
HASH status.
continued from previous page
Count of No Sales.
NOSALE
NON ADD #
CASH-IN-D
Total of numbers
entered into the nonadd key
Total and count of
expected CASH,
CHECK in drawer.
Declaration amounts
and over/short
calculations.
Total and count of
expected in drawer
for each charge
function. (Charge
in drawer will differ
from charge sales if
the charge is overtendered
HASH TTL
CASH DEC AMT
OVER/SHORT
CHECK-IN-D
CHECK DEC AMT
OVER/SHORT
FD/S-IN-D
FOOD DEC AMT
OVER/SHORT
CHG1-IN-D
CHG2-IN-D
CHG3-IN-D
CHG4-IN-D
CHG5-IN-D
CHG6-IN-D
CHG7-IN-D
CHG8-IN-D
CHG1 SALES
Total and count for
each CHARGE key.
CHG2 SALES
CHG3 SALES
CHG4 SALES
CHG5 SALES
CHG6 SALES
CHG7 SALES
CHG8 SALES
0
$0.00
4
547
14
$269.99
269.99
$0.00
3
-108.45
$0.00
-108.45
2
$21.00
$0.00
$21.00
0
$0.00
1
$8.43
1
$8.52
2
-1.60
1
$2.67
2
$13.09
0
$0.00
1
$3.04
0
$0.00
1
$8.43
1
$8.52
2
-1.60
1
$2.67
2
$13.09
0
$0.00
1
$3.04
continued . . .
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Sample Reports • 253
Total for each
Foreign currency in
drawer.
Total of CASH,
CHECKS and
CHARGES in
drawer.
Mix & Match
Discounts applied
Total and count for
PROMO and
WASTE.
Number of
transactions and
total activity in
Training Mode
Total and count of
balances entered
into PBAL key
Total and count of
balances paid
Total and count of
items serviced
Average number if
items per customer,
and average dollar
sales per customer
continued from previous page
FOREIGN 1
FOREIGN 2
FOREIGN 3
FOREIGN 4
DRWR TTL
MIX & MATCH
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
$216.69
0
$0.00
PROMO
1
$1.50
WASTE
8
$12.50
TRAIN TTL
5
$62.59
BAL FORWARD
4
$88.13
GUESTS
5
P/BAL
4
$0.00
CHECKS PAID
2
$18.64
SERVICE
4
$88.13
AVG ITEM/CUST
7.29
AVG $/CUST
$10.81
OPEN CHECK TOTAL
$26.02
********************************
GRAND
$375.63
KELLY
No.000209
00000
Total number of
guests served
Total and count of
all balances serviced
Grand total
Total of open
checks (tracking
totals) from open
check report. Will
not reset with
financial Z report.
254 • Sample Reports
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Time
DATE 11/10/2011 WED
Time Period
Number of
Transactions
Net sales in this
period.
Percentage of total
sales
Number of
Transactions all
periods
Net sales in all
periods.
TIME 15:48
X 1
REPORT
00001
-------------------------------TIME
13:00-14:00
CNT
17
SALES AMT
$183.85
SALES RATE
65.39%
14:00-15:00
CNT
9
SALES AMT
$97.33
SALES RATE
34.61%
********************************
TOTAL CNT
26
TOTAL AMT
$281.18
KELLY
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
No.000236
00000
Sample Reports • 255
PLU
DATE 11/10/2011 WED
TIME 15:33
X 1
REPORT
00001
-------------------------------ALL PLU
PLU number
PLU Descriptor
Count and sales
total.
Percentage of total
sales
Total activity for all
PLUs
Total sales for all
PLUs.
256 • Sample Reports
PLU#1
HAMBURGER
CNT 28
$42.00
SALES RATE
15.64%
PLU#2
DBL BURGER
CNT 40
$99.75
SALES RATE
37.14%
PLU#4
COKE
CNT 26
$38.85
SALES RATE
14.46%
PLU#5
SPRITE
CNT 18
$13.42
SALES RATE
5.00%
PLU#7
ROAST
CNT 19.16
$30.47
SALES RATE
11.34%
PLU#28
UNLEADED
CNT 32.85
$39.39
SALES RATE
14.66%
PLU#29
RETURNS
CNT 10
-20.00
SALES RATE
-7.44%
PLU#33
NAILS
CNT 15.55
$24.72
SALES RATE
9.20%
********************************
TOTAL CNT
189.56
TOTAL AMT
$268.60
KELLY
No.000213
00000
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Clerk
Note: Media totals can be printed for each clerk, if selected in System Option
Programming.
DATE 11/10/2011 WED
TIME 15:36
Clerk Name
X 1
REPORT
00001
-------------------------------ALL CLERK
Number of
Transactions
KELLY
NET SALE
Net sales for this
clerk
Drawer total for this
clerk
10
$155.23
DRWR TTL
$109.81
-------------------------------ZACH
NET SALE
5
$45.14
DRWR TTL
$43.22
-------------------------------ANNA
NET SALE
4
$78.75
DRWR TTL
$67.03
-------------------------------LAURA
NET SALE
2
$0.00
DRWR TTL
$18.64
-------------------------------PEGGY
-------------------------------MOLLY
NET SALE
5
$2.06
DRWR TTL
-22.01
-------------------------------KELLY
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
No.000218
00000
Sample Reports • 257
Individual Clerk
DATE 11/10/2011 WED
TIME 15:36
Clerk Name
X 1
REPORT
00001
-------------------------------INDIVIDUAL CLERK
Number of
Transactions
KELLY
NET SALE
Net sales for this
clerk
Drawer total for this
clerk
10
$155.23
DRWR TTL
$109.81
-------------------------------KELLY
No.000218
00000
Groups
DATE 11/10/2011 WED
Group Descriptor
Number of items
sold in this group
Net sales for this
group
Number of items
sold in all groups.
Net sales for all
groups.
258 • Sample Reports
TIME 15:34
X 1
REPORT
00001
-------------------------------GROUP
GROUP : 1 FOOD
CNT
68
SALES AMT
$141.75
GROUP : 2 DRINK
CNT
44
SALES AMT
$52.27
GROUP : 3 REST.
CNT
112
SALES AMT
$194.02
GROUP : 5 STORE
CNT
19.16
SALES AMT
$30.47
GROUP : 8 MDSE
CNT
58.40
SALES AMT
$44.11
GROUP : 9 STORE MDSE
CNT
77.56
SALES AMT
$74.58
********************************
TOTAL CNT
189.56
TOTAL AMT
$268.60
KELLY
No.000237
00000
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Day
The Day (Daily Sales) report lists net sales for each day of the month.
DATE 11/10/2011 WED
TIME 15:47
X 2
REPORT
00001
-------------------------------DAY
Count
Net Sales
Percentage of total
DAY : 12
CNT
2
SALES AMT
$6.00
SALES RATE
50.00%
DAY : 12
CNT
2
SALES AMT
$6.00
SALES RATE
50.00%
********************************
TOTAL CNT
4
TOTAL AMT
$12.00
CLERK 1
No.00047
0000
Stock
DATE 11/10/2011 WED
PLU number
PLU Descriptor
Current inventory
count
TIME 15:47
X 1
REPORT
00001
-------------------------------ALL PLU STOCK
PLU#1
HAMBURGER
CNT
PLU#2
DBL BURGER
CNT
PLU#7
ROAST
CNT
PLU#28
UNLEADED
CNT
PLU#33
NAILS
CNT
KELLY
26
15
25.96
1488.47
No.000228
DATE 11/10/2011 WED
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
161.25
00000
TIME 15:47
Sample Reports • 259
Clerk Time Report
DATE 11/10/2011 WED
Clerk Name
Date and time for
the last ten time
clock punches (in &
out)
Total time for clerk
Total time for all
clerks
260 • Sample Reports
TIME 15:36
X 1
REPORT
00001
-------------------------------INDIVI. CLERK TIME
KELLY
TIME IN :
11/09/2011
07:52
TIME OUT:
11/09/2011
15:44
TIME IN :
11/10/2011
07:52
TIME OUT:
11/10/2011
13:50
TIME WORKED :
0013:50
ZACH
TIME IN :
11/09/2011
07:26
TIME OUT:
11/09/2011
14:55
TIME IN :
11/10/2011
07:26
TIME OUT:
11/10/2011
14:22
TIME IN :
11/11/2011
06:58
TIME WORKED :
0014:25
ANNA
TIME IN :
11/09/2011
12:52
TIME OUT:
11/09/2011
15:42
TIME IN :
11/10/2011
06:44
TIME OUT:
11/10/2011
14:55
TIME WORKED :
0011:01
LAURA
TIME IN :
11/09/2011
02:33
TIME OUT:
11/09/2011
07:55
TIME IN :
11/09/2011
12:44
TIME OUT:
11/09/2011
18:44
TIME IN :
11/10/2011
09:55
TIME WORKED :
0011:22
PEGGY
TIME IN :
11/10/2011
13:52
TIME WORKED :
0000:00
MOLLY
TIME IN :
11/09/2011
01:05
TIME OUT:
11/09/2011
09:55
TIME IN :
11/10/2011
07:44
TIME WORKED :
0008:50
-------------------------------TOTAL WORKED :
0059:28
KELLY
No.000217
00000
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Check File
DATE 11/10/2011 WED
Open check number
and balance.
Clerk responsible
for the check.
TIME 15:59
X 1
REPORT
00001
-------------------------------OPEN CHECK
CHECK
MOLLY
CHECK
KELLY
CHECK
KELLY
CHECK
KELLY
: 3
$24.07
: 4
$45.42
: 5
$24.50
: 6
$28.33
KELLY
No.000243
00000
PLU Zero Sale
DATE 11/10/1999 WED
TIME 15:59
X 1
REPORT
00001
-------------------------------PLU ZERO SALE
PLU Descriptor
ITEM
PLU#
-------------------------------PLU11
#11
PLU14
#14
PLU15
#15
PLU16
#16
PLU19
#19
PLU20
#20
CLERK 1
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
No.000243
PLU Number
00000
Sample Reports • 261
Balancing Formulas
262 • Sample Reports
+/-
Net Sales
$ Example
=
PLU Sales Total
$
+
Tax 1
$
+
Tax 2
$
+
Tax 3
$
+
Tax 4
$
+
Sale Coupon Amounts
$
+
Sale Percent Discounts
$
+
Sale Surcharge
Amounts
$
=
Net Sales
$
+/-
Gross Sales
$ Example
=
Net Sales
$
+
Negative PLU Total
$
+
Item Coupon Total
$
+
Item Percent Discount
$
+
Sale Coupon Amounts
$
+
Sale Percent Discounts
$
+
Credit Tax 1
$
+
Credit Tax 2
$
+
Credit Tax 3
$
+
Credit Tax 4
$
+
Merchandise Return
$
+
Void Position Total
$
+
Mix & Match Total
$
=
Gross Sales
$
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Integrated Payment Appendix
One Day Example of Credit Authorization
Open Batch
NOTE: To present things in a logical order, OPEN BATCH is shown at the beginning of the
day, but in practical day-to-day operation it is recommended to open a new batch right after
closing today’s batch, so it is ready to go for the next day.
1. Turn the control lock to the Clear Totals position to display the RESET
REPORT MODE menu:
RESET REPORT MODE
0.Z REPORTS
1.RESET E.J.
2.PC COMMUNICATION
3.MIX & MATCH PROGRAM
4.MIX & MATCH SCAN
5.PLU LOOKUP PROGRAM
6.AGE VERIFICATION

2. Press PAGE DOWN to view the remaining Reset Mode options:
RESET REPORT MODE
7.RESET NOT FOUND PLU
8.KP STARTING No.
9.DATATRAN(DEBIT)
00.DATATRAN
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20

Integrated Payment Appendix • 263
3. Press 00 to display the DataTran Operation menu:
DATATRAN OPERATION
0.INITIALIZE EFT
1.OPEN BATCH
2.CLOSE CURR. BATCH

4.CHG. BATCH NUMBER
5.ISSUE LOCAL TOTAL
6.ISSUE TRANSACTION
4. If necessary, press PAGE DOWN to display the second page of the DataTran
Operation menu:
DATATRAN OPERATION
7.ISSUE BATCH STATUS
8.DIAL IN LOAD
9.DIAL OUT LOAD

5. Press 1 to open the batch. The message “WAITING RESP” displays. No
printing takes place.
264 • Integrated Payment Appendix
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Sample Transaction
1. Register a normal transaction. Press the appropriate CHARGE key. The
message ‘SLIDE CARD” displays:
REGISTER MODE
2 PLU1 T1
2.00
██████████████
█ SLIDE CARD █
██████████████
TAX 0.00 SUBT
2.00
2. Swipe the card. The message “WORKI NG.” displays until the card verification
is complete.
REGISTER MODE
2 PLU1 T1
2.00
██████████████
█
WORKING █
██████████████
TAX 0.00 SUBT
2.00
3. When verification is complete, the draft is printed.
Note: If multiple documents are to be printed, the message “PRESS CASH TO
CONTINUE” displays. Tear off the printer paper, and press CASH to resume printing.
Sample Draft
5/26/04
10:10
SALE
************6301
APP: VITAL8
REF: 41415013334
REC NO : 1
00001
$2.00
X___________________________
I AGREE TO PAY ABOVE
TOTAL AMOUNT ACCORDING
TO CARD ISSUER AGREEMENT
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Integrated Payment Appendix • 265
Sample Draft – With Gratuity
To print the tip entry line, see System Option programming page 18 and select the option
“EFT DRAFT IS” to “N” (no).
5/26/04
10:10
00001
SALE
************6301
APP: VITAL8
REF: 41415013334
REC NO : 1
$2.00
TIP_____________________________
TOTAL___________________________
X___________________________
I AGREE TO PAY ABOVE
TOTAL AMOUNT ACCORDING
TO CARD ISSUER AGREEMENT
266 • Integrated Payment Appendix
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Manual Card Entry
PIN Debit payments must be processed as card-present transactions—card data must be
read by the card reader and cannot be manually entered. This is a card requirement,
not a function of the point of sale equipment. Manual card entry is allowed on Credit,
Gift and EBT transactions if the reader is unable to read the card.
Visa or Mastercard branded Debit cards used for PIN Debit may also be used like credit
cards, with just a signature. If a Debit card presented for a PIN Debit transaction fails
to read, at the CARD ERROR message press CLEAR. You can now choose an
alternative payment method. Press the CREDIT function. Slide the same Debit card, if
it fails to read again, select CLEAR. The message “Enter Acct No” displays. You can
manually enter the account number and complete the transaction. The merchant may
pay different card fees for PIN Debit and signature Debit transactions.
1. Register a normal transaction. Press the appropriate CHARGE key. The
message ‘SLIDE CARD” displays:
REGISTER MODE
2 PLU1 T1
2.00
██████████████
█ SLIDE CARD █
██████████████
TAX 0.00 SUBT
2.00
2. If card will not read, press Clear once, the message “ENTER ACCT NO”
displays.
REGISTER MODE
2 PLU1 T1
2.00
█████████████████
█ ENTER ACCT NO █
█████████████████
TAX 0.00 SUBT
2.00
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Integrated Payment Appendix • 267
3. Enter the account number and press CASH (or press Clear twice to abort the
transaction.)
REGISTER MODE
2 PLU1 T1
2.00
█████████████████
█ ENTER EXP DATE█
█████████████████
TAX 0.00 SUBT
2.00
4. When verification is complete, the draft is printed.
Note: If multiple documents are to be printed, the message “PRESS CASH TO
CONTINUE” displays. Tear off the printer paper, and press CASH to resume printing.
268 • Integrated Payment Appendix
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Merchandise Return
Complete the merchandise return transaction as you would a normal transaction. Press
MDSE RTRN prior to entering each returned item.
1. Register a normal transaction. Press the appropriate CHARGE key. The
message ‘SLIDE CARD” displays:
REGISTER MODE
1 PLU1 T1
1 PLU1 T1
-1.00
-1.00
██████████████
█ SLIDE CARD █
██████████████
TAX 0.00 SUBT
12.00
2. Swipe the card. The message “WAITING RESP.” displays until the card
verification is complete.
REGISTER MODE
1 PLU1 T1
1 PLU1 T1
██████████████
█WAITING RESP█
██████████████
TAX 0.00 SUBT
-1.00
-1.00
2.00
3. When verification is complete, the draft is printed.
Note: If multiple documents are to be printed, the message “PRESS CASH TO
CONTINUE” displays. Tear off the printer paper, and press CASH to resume printing.
Sample Draft
5/26/04
10:42
SALE
************6301
APP: *7
REF: 00003
REC NO : 3
1
-2.00
X___________________________
I AGREE TO PAY ABOVE
TOTAL AMOUNT ACCORDING
TO CARD ISSUER AGREEMENT
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Integrated Payment Appendix • 269
Void Transaction
Transaction Void allows a transaction to be removed from the batch and not reported to the
cardholder statement.
1. Turn the key lock to the VOID position.
2. Register a normal transaction.
3. Press the appropriate CHARGE key. The message “SLIDE CARD” displays
4. Swipe the card. The message “ENTER APP CODE” displays:
VOID MODE
2 PLU1 T1
-2.00
██████████████████
█ ENTER APP CODE █
██████████████████
TAX 0.00 SUBT
12.00
5. Enter the authorization code printed for the transaction to be voided, press
CASH. The message “ENTER REF NO” displays:
VOID MODE
2 PLU1 T1
-2.00
████████████████
█ ENTER REF NO █
████████████████
TAX 0.00 SUBT
12.00
6. Enter the Reference number from the transaction to be voided; press CASH. The
message “WAITING RESP.” displays until the transaction is found and the
original record removed.
270 • Integrated Payment Appendix
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Local Total Report
Run an Issue Local Total report to confirm that credit totals match the financial report before
closing the batch.
Tip (Gratuity) Entry
Gratuities (tips) indicated by the customer on the payment draft must be entered into the ECR
before the batch is closed.
1. Turn the control lock to the Clear Totals position to display the RESET
REPORT MODE menu.
2. Press 00 to display the DataTran Operation menu.
3. Press Page Down to view the second page of the DataTran Operation menu
4. Press 00 (Tip Operation) to enter tips.
TIP OPERATION
ENTER REC NO.

ORIG TRAN AMOUNT
TIP AMOUNT
5. Enter the record number of the transaction and press CASH.
6. Enter the original transaction amount and press CASH.
7. Enter the tip amount and press CASH.
8. If the record number and transaction number are valid, the tip amount is entered
in the batch and a tip entry chit prints as shown below.
Sample Tip Chit
DATE 09/27/2011 MON TIME 10:41
SALE AMOUNT: $426
TIP AMOUNT: $1.50
REF: *
REC: 2
EMPLOYEE1
NO.000023
REG 01
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Integrated Payment Appendix • 271
Close Batch
NOTE: To present things in a logical order, OPEN BATCH is shown at the beginning of the
day, but in practical day-to-day operation it is recommended to open a new batch right after
closing today’s batch, so it is ready to go for the next day.
1. Turn the control lock to the Clear Totals position to display the RESET
REPORT MODE menu:
RESET REPORT MODE
0.Z REPORTS
1.RESET E.J.
2.PC COMMUNICATION
3.MIX & MATCH PROGRAM
4.MIX & MATCH SCAN
5.PLU LOOKKUP PROGRAM
6.AGE VERIFICATION
2. Press PAGE DOWN to view the next page of the RESET REPORT MENU.
RESET REPORT MODE
9.DATATRAN(DEBIT)
00.DATATRAN
3. Press 00 to display the DataTran Operation menu, or if the application is using
debit, press 9.
DATATRAN OPERATION
0.INITIALIZE EFT
1.OPEN BATCH
2.CLOSE CURR. BATCH

4.CHG. BATCH NUMBER
5.ISSUE LOCAL TOTAL
6.ISSUE TRANSACTION
4. Press 2 to close the current batch. The message “WAITING RESP” displays.
When communication is complete, the Local Batch Status prints and the batch is
closed.
272 • Integrated Payment Appendix
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Close Batch
See Explanations
DATE 5/24/2011 WED
TIME 10:34
**** LOCAL BATCH STATUS ****
O 4 3 3 2.00 0 .00
CLERK 1
000065 00000
Local Batch Status Explanations:
(From Left to Right)
O
Batch Status C=Closed/O=Open/X=Incomplete
4
Batch Number
3
Batch Transaction Count
3
Batch Item Count
2.00
Batch Balance
0
Batch Forwarded Transaction Count
.00
Batch Forwarded Balance
Integrated Payment Program Requirements
1. See RS232 Options on page 122 and set the port options for the serial port where the
DataTran is connected. Set the BAUD to 2400 and the device field to EFT (option 10)
and leave the remaining fields at the default settings.
2. See System Option Programming on page 160. Press PAGE DOWN until SYSTEM
OPTION pg 21 displays.
Set EFT DRAFT to Y (DATATRAN) for a normal draft. Set EFT DRAFT to N (FINE
DINING) for a draft with a tip entry line.
Set MSR CONNECTED to 0 if the MSR is connected to the DATATRAN. SET to 1 if
the MSR is connected to the PDC; or set to 2 if the card reader is internal.
3. See Print Option Programming on page 171. Press PAGE DOWN until PRINT OPTION
pg 16 displays. Set the number of DataTran receipt copies you wish printed.
4. See CHARGE 1-8 on page 189 to set the options for integrated payment charge
functions. From the appropriate charge program screen, select Y (yes) at the CONNECT
EFT field. Select CREDIT, DEBIT, GIFT or GIFT NSF at the SELECT field. Check
with your CRS representative to verify availability of different payment methods.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Integrated Payment Appendix • 273
DataTran Operation Menu
1. Turn the control lock to the Clear Totals position to display the RESET
REPORT MODE menu.
2. Press 00 to display the DataTran Operation menu:
DATATRAN OPERATION
0.INITIALIZE EFT
1.OPEN BATCH
2.CLOSE CURR. BATCH

4.CHG. BATCH NUMBER
5.ISSUE LOCAL TOTAL
6.ISSUE TRANSACTION
3. If necessary, press PAGE DOWN to display the second page of the DataTran
Operation menu:
DATATRAN OPERATION
7.ISSUE BATCH STATUS
8.DIAL IN LOAD
9.DIAL OUT LOAD
00.TIP OPERATION

4. Review the explanations that follow and select the appropriate operation.
Initialize EFT
Select Initialize EFT to verify communications, software versions and installed networks.
List of Installed Networks
DATE 5/24/2011 THU TIME 16:15
** LIST INSTALLED NETWORRKS **
CHK DEN --- --- VER:3.89
OFF ON OFF OFF
EMPLOYEE1
NO.000019 REG 01
Software Version
Status of Installed
274 • Integrated Payment Appendix
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Change Batch Number
The change batch number command is used to assign a new batch number to an existing
batch. It is used with certain credit card processors to rectify settlement problems. It is used
infrequently. (Attempt to change batch number will be denied if bank does not allow the
feature.)
Issue Local Total
This report is added for ease of customer balancing actual totals in the DataTran to the system
wide reports. A summary of each kind of credit card and a batch total should match the totals
within the SPS-300 system-wide report before the Settle Batch is attempted.
DATE 5/24/2011 WED TIME 10:55
****LOCAL TOTAL REPORT ****
AMEX
.00 0
VISA
120.32 5
MASTER
.00 0
DISCOVER
.00 0
PRIVATE LABEL .00 0
DINERS
.00 0
JCB
.00 0
DEBIT
.00 0
TOTAL
120.32 5
CLERK 1
000069 00000
Issue Transaction
The Local Transaction Report contains details of each transaction in the current batch.
Example
(See Appendix for report key.)
DATE 5/24/2011 WED
TIME 10:59
*** LOCAL TRANSACTION REPORT ***
1 A 54 ************6301 0501 1 V
ITAL6 * 100.00 * * * * * 4 * 052
604 113803 5 @ NY * * 00 * * D 1
00 00 * * * 00001 * * * * * 0524
04 113803 * * * * 00 *
CLERK 1
000070 00000
Issue Batch Status
The Local Batch Status Report also prints when a batch is closed.
See Explanations
DATE 5/24/2011 WED
TIME 10:34
**** LOCAL BATCH STATUS ****
0 4 3 3 2.00 0 .00
CLERK 1
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
000065 00000
Integrated Payment Appendix • 275
Local Batch Status Explanations:
(From Left to Right)
o
Batch Status C=Closed/O=Open/X=Incomplete
4
Batch Number
3
Batch Transaction Count
3
Batch Item Count
2.00
Batch Balance
0
Batch Forwarded Transaction Count
.00
Batch Forwarded Balance
Dial In Load/Dial Out Load
For Legacy DataTran equipment:
If instructed by Datacap support, you can use these options to update DataTran software.
Choose Enable Dial In Load to allow Datacap to call the DataTran and send updates. Choose
Enable Dial Out Load to call Datacap to connect. You will be required to enter the phone
number and terminal I.D. (password) which will be given to you by Datacap.
For TwinTran:
When a TwinTran is first installed, the dealer must do a Dial Out Load through the IP
connection. If, for any reason, the internet is not available, the device cannot be loaded. If it
is being installed at a location where the Internet is not currently operational and the customer
wants to use the dial out method for approvals, the procedure below must be done at a
location where the internet is working.
To load a TwinTran using a Sam4s register;
With the TwinTran connected to the register and an active Ethernet line, enter into the Dial
Out mode. At the Phone number field enter the number “1”. If the register uses the code
entry method for alpha characters enter the 3 digit code (049). At the Enter ID prompt, enter
the serial number of the TwinTran. Select Tone phone connection. The TwinTran will call
Datacap’s host PC and load itself. This takes approximately 20 seconds. After the TwinTran is
loaded, one successful credit transaction must be done. After that the unit can be connected as
the customer wishes.
Tip Operation
Follow the prompts to enter the record number, original transaction amount and tip amount.
If the record number and transaction number are valid, the tip amount is entered in the batch
and a tip entry chit prints.
276 • Integrated Payment Appendix
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Local Transaction Report Key
A B C D E F G H I J K H I J K L M N O P Q R S T [U V WX Y Z AA BB]
Field Description
Min
Max Type
A
Transaction Sequence Number
1
5
Numeric
B
Transaction Status
1
1
Alphanumeric
C
Network Transaction Code
1
3
Alphanumeric
D
Credit Card Account Number
1
38
Alphanumeric
E
Expiration Date
4
4
Numeric
F
Card Reader Flag
1
1
Numeric
G
Approval Code
1
16
Alphanumeric
H
Reference Number
1
16
Alphanumeric
I
Transaction Amount
3
11
Numeric
J
Operator ID
1
10
Alphanumeric
K
AMEX Category or Product Code
1
10
Alphanumeric
L
Arrival Date
3
6
Numeric
M
Departure Date
3
6
Numeric
N
Gratuity Amount
3
11
Numeric
O
Media Type
1
2
Numeric
P
Special Program Code
1
1
Numeric
Q
Transaction Date
3
6
Numeric
R
Transaction Time
4
4
Numeric
S
Authorization Source Code
1
1
Numeric
T
Card Holder ID
1
1
Numeric
U
PS2000 or MIC Payment Service Indicator
1
1
Alphanumeric
V
PS2000 Transaction ID or
15
15
Alphanumeric
MIC Banknet Reference Number
9
9
Alphanumeric
MIC Banknet Authorization Date
4
4
Numeric
MIC POS Entry Mode
1
1
Alphanumeric
MIC Mag Stripe Error Code
1
1
Alphanumeric
W
PS2000 Validation Code
4
4
Alphanumeric
X
Authorization Response Code
2
2
Alphanumeric
Y
PS2000 Authorization Currency Code or
3
3
Alphanumeric
MIC Entry Mode Change Indicator
1
1
Alphanumeric
MIC Track Data - CVC Error
1
1
Alphanumeric
MIC Track Data - Error Code
1
1
Alphanumeric
ZMerchant Category Code
2
2
Alphanumeric
AAEntry Mode
2
2
Alphanumeric
BBOriginal Authorized Amount
3
11
Numeric
Local Transaction Report Field Definitions
A. Transaction Sequence Number: The DataTran will use this field to return the internal sequence
number assigned to each accessed transaction.
B. Transaction Status: The DataTran will use this field to return the current status of each accessed
transaction.
Allowed values: “A” = Authorized but not captured, “C” = Captured, “F” = Forced Entry,
or “V” = Void.
C. Network Transaction Code: When available, the DataTran will use this field to return the service
provider’s code assigned to each accessed transaction.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Integrated Payment Appendix • 277
D. Credit Card Account Number: The DataTran will use this field to return the card account number
used in each accessed transaction .
E. Expiration Date: The DataTran will use this field to return the expiration date of the credit card
used in each accessed transaction.
Format: “YYMM” or “MMYY” (“YY” = year and “MM” = month).
F. Card Reader Flag: The DataTran will use this field to return the type of account number entry
used in each accessed transaction.
Allowed values: 0 = Hand entered account number, or 1 = Entered by card reader.
G. Approval Code: The DataTran will use this field to return the approval code of each accessed
transaction.
H. Reference Number: When available, the DataTran will use this field to return the reference
number of each accessed transaction.
I. Transaction Amount: The DataTran will use this field to return the sales amount of each accessed
transaction.
Format: -9999999.99 (decimal point required).
J. Operator ID: When available, the DataTran will use this field to return the cashier or operator ID
number entered in each accessed transaction.
K. AMEX Category or Product Code: When available, the DataTran will use this field to return the
American Express product or category code of each accessed transaction.
L. Arrival Date: When available, the DataTran will use this field to return the customer’s arrival date
entered in each accessed transaction.
Formats: “MMDDYY” (“MM” = month, “DD” = day, and “YY” = year).
M. Departure Date: When available, the DataTran will use this field to return the customer’s
departure date entered in each accessed transaction.
Formats: “MMDDYY” (“MM” = month, “DD” = day, and “YY” = year).
N. Gratuity Amount: When available, the DataTran will use this field to return the gratuity amount
entered in each accessed transaction.
Format: -9999999.99 (decimal point required).
O. Media Type: The DataTran will use this field to return the media type used in each accessed
transaction:
2 = American Express 6 = Private Label
3 = Visa 7 = Diner’s Club or Carte Blanche
4 = MasterCard 8 = JCB
5 = Discover 9 = Debit
P. Special Program Code: When available, the DataTran will use this field to return the special
program code entered for each accessed transaction.
Q. Transaction Date: The DataTran will use this field to return the date of each accessed transaction.
Formats: “MMDDYY” (“MM” = month, “DD” = day, and “YY” = year).
R. Transaction Time: The DataTran will use this field to return the time of each accessed transaction.
Format: “HHMM” (“HH” = military hours and “MM” minutes).
S. Authorization Source Code: When available, the DataTran will use this field to return the
Authorization Source Code of each accessed transaction.
T. Card Holder ID: When available, the DataTran will use this field to return the Card Holder ID
type of each accessed transaction.
U. Payment Service Indicator: When available, the DataTran will use this field to return the Payment
Service Indicator (also referred to as the ACI field) of each accessed transaction.
V. Transaction ID: When available, the DataTran will use this field to return either the PS2000
Transaction ID number or MIC data of each accessed transaction.
W. Validation Code: When available, the DataTran will use this field (also known as the ACI field) to
return the validation code of each accessed transaction.
278 • Integrated Payment Appendix
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
X. Authorization Response Code: When available, the DataTran will use this field to return the
authorization response code of each accessed transaction.
Y. Authorization Currency Code: When available, the DataTran will use this field to return the
authorization currency code of each accessed transaction.
Z. Merchant Category Code: When available, the DataTran will use this field to return the merchant
category code of each accessed transaction.
AA.
Entry Mode: When available, the DataTran will use this field to return the entry mode of each
accessed transaction.
BB. Original Authorization Amount: When available, the DataTran will use this field to return the
original authorization amount of each accessed transaction.
Format: -9999999.99 (decimal point required).
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Integrated Payment Appendix • 279
280 • Integrated Payment Appendix
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
IRC (Inter-Register
Communications) Appendix
Overview
IRC is standard feature of the SPS-300. Each register is equipped with a standard Ethernetstyle network connector. Up to eight registers can be connected to an Ethernet switch in a
simple “star topology” configuration.

Optionally, in a 2-unit installation (shown below), ECRs can be connected with a
crossover cable, eliminating the need for the Ethernet switch.

CRS supplies 5-port (p/n 140114) and 8-port (p/n 140115) switches.
Ethernet
Switch
Crossover Cable
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
IRC (Inter-Register Communications) Appendix • 281
IRC Functions
Reports
Using IRC, you can generate consolidated X (read) or Z (reset) reports from any
register in the system. The report option screen allows you to select “All” or specify
individual register(s) for consolidation. See “X Reports” on page 94 or “Note: Option
#8, KP Starting No. was added at firmware version 1.034.
Z Reports” on page 103 for detailed report-taking instructions.
Busy Registers
Reports cannot be taken from registers that are busy (inside a transaction) or powered “OFF”.
The message “IRC NOT READY” will display if an attempt is made to communicate with a
register that is not available. The register number of the unavailable register will also display.
Best Practice: In IRC systems it is recommended to use only the key lock to turn the
register to “OFF”. You may wish to leave the power switch in the “ON” positon and use
the Power Switch cover (see page 13) to prevent the register from being turned off
inadvertently (and therefore not available for IRC functions.) With the power switch
“ON” you can turn the key to “OFF” so that reports and polling function will remain
available.
Device Sharing
Limited device sharing is available for remote printers and Datatran integrated payment
appliances and polling. Through IRC, traffic from satellite registers is sent to the Datatran or
printer that is attached to one of the registers in the network. In the case of polling, the PC
can access satellite registers through the connection to one of the registers.
Notes:
Caution: The register where the shared device is connected will be momentarily busy when
traffic from a satellite register is communicated. The message “WORKING” will display
momentarily on the register that is connected to the shared device until the communication is
complete.
Best Practice: In an IRC System where both a Datatran and remote printer are shared, it is
recommended that both devices be connected to the same register to reduce the amount of
cross-traffic between registers.
Feature Notes:
The Tracking File (Check File) cannot be shared through IRC. If check tracking is used, each
register will maintain its own file. Separate check files on individual registers can be polled
through IRC.
Other optional RS-232 devices, such as scales, scanners, pole displays, and coin dispensers
operate exclusively with the register to which they are connected, and cannot be shared.
282 • IRC (Inter-Register Communications) Appendix
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
IRC Programming & Setup
The only IRC settings are made by selecting IRC OPTIONS from the S-Mode menu. See.
“IRC Options” on page 121 to make these settings. If a kitchen printer or Datatran is used as
a shared device, you must identify the register where the device is connected at the program.
Note: If a new register is added to an existing IRC network, you must power on/off all
registers so the the new register will be recognized.
Communication Cable Specifications
At minimum, CRS recommends Shielded Category 5e STP , 4 twisted pair cable, for use as
communication wiring for SPS-2000/SPS-5X0 system.
NOTE: Higher rated cables, such as Cat 6 are also acceptable.
CAT 5e STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cable is a high quality general purpose data
communications cable that supports standard transmission protocols such as 232, 422, 485,
and 10/100 Base-T Ethernet communications. CAT 5e STP cable consists of 4 pairs of
stranded, twisted pair wire, with an overall shield foil.
Note: CRS supplies different modular connectors for use with stranded or solid cable.
Use P/N 202896 with stranded cable; use P/N 202994 with solid cable.
Do not use unshielded CAT 5e, unless run alone inside conduit.
Shielded CAT5e Cable
Communication Conduit Size
Table 1-3 is a guide to the conduit size needed to fit certain numbers of communication
cables:
Table 1-3: Cable/Conduit Size
Number of
Category 5 Cables
1
2
4
6
12
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Conduit Size
(InsideDiameter)
0.5”
0.75”
1.0”
1.25”
1.5”
IRC (Inter-Register Communications) Appendix • 283
The communications cable contractors should ensure that the Communication cable is pulled
and the Termination Block mounted as close as possible to the SPS-2000/SPS-500 devices. If
it is not their responsibility to terminate the cable, then they must ensure that there is 3 feet
(1m) of cable left for this purpose.
If the CAT 5 communications cabling system is to be terminated by a cabling specialist, then
the cabling companies must conform to the EIA/TIA 568B termination standard.
Communication Cable Termination
Straight Thru Cable - Color Coding and Terminal Connection
Pin # Color
Pin # Color
1
Orange/White
1
Orange/White
2
Orange
2
Orange
3
Green/White
3
Green/White
4
Blue
4
Blue
5
Blue/White
5
Blue/White
6
Green
6
Green
7
Brown/White
7
Brown/White
8
Brown
8
Brown
284 • IRC (Inter-Register Communications) Appendix
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Crossover Cable - Color Coding and Terminal Connection
Pin # Color
Pin # Color
1
Green/White
1
Orange/White
2
Green
2
Orange
3
Orange/White
3
Green/White
4
Blue
4
Blue
5
Blue/White
5
Blue/White
6
Orange
6
Green
7
Brown/White
7
Brown/White
8
Brown
8
Brown
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
IRC (Inter-Register Communications) Appendix • 285
Ethernet Cable Termination Instructions
1. Pull the cable off the reel to the desired length and cut. If you are pulling cables
through holes, it is easier to attach the RJ-45 plugs after the cable is pulled. The total
length of wire segments between an SPS-2000/SPS-5X0 and a switch or between two
ECRs cannot exceed 100 Meters (328 feet).
2. Start on one end and strip the cable jacket off (about 1") using a stripper or a knife.
Be extra careful not to nick the wires, otherwise you will need to start over.
3. Spread, untwist the pairs, and arrange the wires in the order of the desired cable end.
Flatten the end between your thumb and forefinger. Trim the ends of the wires so
they are even with one another, leaving only 1/2" in wire length. If it is longer than
1/2" it will be out-of-spec and susceptible to crosstalk. Flatten and insure there are no
spaces between wires.
4. Hold the RJ-45 plug with the clip facing down or away from you. Push the wires
firmly into the plug. Inspect each wire is flat even at the front of the plug. Check the
order of the wires. Double check again. Check that the jacket is fitted right against
the stop of the plug. Carefully hold the wire and firmly crimp the RJ-45 with the
crimper.
5. Check the color orientation. Check that the crimped connection is not about to come
apart, and check to see if the wires are flat against the front of the plug. If even one of
these is incorrect, you will have to start over. Test the Ethernet cable.
Ethernet Cable Tips

A crossover is used to connect two Ethernet devices without a switch.

A crossover has one end with the Orange set of wires switched with the Green set.

Odd numbered pins are always striped, even numbered pins are always solid colored.

Looking at the RJ-45 with the clip facing away from you, Brown is always on the
right, and pin 1 is on the left.

No more than 1/2" of the Ethernet cable should be untwisted otherwise it will be
susceptible to crosstalk.

Do not deform, do not bend, do not stretch, do not staple, do not run parallel with
power cables, and do not run Ethernet cables near noise inducing components.
Routing Communication Cable
NO T E
NO T E
Communication cable must be kept a minimum of one (1) foot away from AC wiring or
fluorescent lighting and at least five (5) feet away from large transformers or motors. If
the communication cable must cross AC wiring, it must cross at a 90 angle to the AC
wiring.
Metal Conduit should be used wherever there is a chance of damage to the wire
including telephone rooms and basements (where rodents could pose a problem). This
conduit should be attached to the building ground not the isolated ground.
Communications cable must NOT be placed alongside or in the same conduit as AC
power or telephone signals.
NO T E
The bending radius on CAT 5e UTP or STP cable is to be a minimum of 1 inch.
286 • IRC (Inter-Register Communications) Appendix
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Plenum Ceilings
The Plenum rated Category 5, has a durable Teflon coating and is safety rated for air
plenums. Conduit is only needed when the communication cable is exposed in areas of high
traffic or harsh conditions (exterior mounted cables, Terminal and Printer locations in kitchen
and bar areas etc.).
Direct Burial Cable
For exterior use, Category 5 direct burial cable is specially designed for direct burial with a
durable covering for protection.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
IRC (Inter-Register Communications) Appendix • 287
Glossary
Activity Count
The activity counter increments each time an entry is made on a particular PLU, or function
key. The counter prints on the appropriate reports.
Cancel
Press the CANCEL function to abort a transaction in progress. All current items are removed
(voided).
Cash Declaration
This option forces the operator to count the cash drawer and input the results before the
financial report can be taken. Absentee owners may want clerks or managers to declare the
drawer counts to insure that all cash is deposited, regardless of overages, or shortages. As an
added benefit, the overage or shortage amount is calculated and printed on the financial
report.
Clerk
Sales clerks are individuals who are responsible for selling the merchandise to the customer.
Typically, management wants to know merchandise sales levels for each clerk, in order to
monitor productivity, account for cash and other media, and/or pay commissions. The default
program provides operation for 15 clerks, however up to 99 different clerks can used by
changing the default memory allocation.
Compulsory
When an operation is programmed compulsory, the appropriate entry must be performed in
order to complete the operation.
Compulsory Amount Tendering
This forces the operator to input the tender, rather than pressing a payment key directly. The
change will always be computed by the register when a customer tenders an amount greater
than the total due. Compulsory tendering will reduce cashier change errors.
Compulsory Condiment
When a kitchen printer, or requisition system is used, the merchant may wish to force the
entry of a condiment or instruction for specific items. If compulsory condiment status is set
for a specific PLU, then a condiment PLU must follow the entry of the item.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Glossary • 289
Compulsory Drawer
With compulsory drawer enabled, the clerk cannot begin a new transaction until the drawer is
closed. This simple feature was designed to teach cashiers the habit of closing the cash
drawer after each transaction. You’ll reduce potential errors, theft and fraud that can take
place when your cashier works out of an open drawer.
Compulsory Number Entry
This option forces the operator to enter a reference number (using the #/NS key) before a
PLU entry can be made or a transaction finalized with a Charge key. The number could
represent an SKU number that would be tracked manually, or other data such as a customer
count.
Consecutive Number
A sequential number is printed on each receipt issued. This is not a “customer count” as this
number is incremented for non-sales activity such as no-sales and reports. A count of revenue
generating transactions (true customer count) is printed with the Net Sales total on the
financial report.
Currency Conversion
Use the currency conversion function to convert and display the value of the transaction in
foreign currency. Only cash tender is allowed after pressing the currency conversion
function. Change is calculated and issued in home currency.
Decimal Multiplication
If you sell weighed goods, yard goods, or any merchandise sold in fractions of a unit, the
decimal multiplication feature calculates each transaction quickly and accurately. For
example, if your customer selects 4.75 pounds of an item sold at $1.59 per pound, you enter
4.75 on the numeric keypad, press the X/TIME (multiplication) key, then enter the price per
pound and press the appropriate PLU key.
Default Program
The original program installed in the SPS-300 Series. The register has a default program
which makes it operational after a memory clear. Nearly all option, rate, and status programs
are set to zero as the default condition.
Department
Note: The SPS-300 Series uses price look-ups (PLUs) to perform the function of traditional
cash register departments. PLUs may be registered directly on the keyboard (like traditional
departments) or indirectly by entering the item or PLU number and then pressing the PLU
key.
290 • Glossary
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Electronic Journal
The SPS-320 does not provide a journal printer; the SPS-340 and SPS-345 provide a
traditional journal printer. Today many systems, even expensive PC-based systems do not
print a traditional sales journal. For business records, a copy of daily financial summaries is
usually all that is needed. Like some of the more expensive POS systems, the SAM4s SPS300 Series has the capability of storing a sales journal in memory. The electronic journal can
be reviewed and discarded, saved to an SD card or polled by a PC for archival. When ECR
memory reserved for electronic journal is full, current records are saved and old data is
discarded.
Error Condition
An error condition signals that mis-operation has occurred. It is identified by an audible tone
and an error descriptor appearing on the display.
Error Correct
An error correct operation voids the last item entered, it must be used within a sale.
Flash ROM
Flash ROM is used by the manufacturer to contain the program that runs the register. Flash
ROMs maintain memory when power is off, allowing the register to be especially stable and
reliable. In the case that the register’s program is improved, or updated, the Flash ROM can
be updated by a qualified service technician through a utility in the register.
Food Stamp
Note: Many areas now administer food stamp payments through EBT cards, rather than
traditional food stamp coupons. The SPS-300 Series is not capable of accepting EBT
electronic payments at this time.
Merchants who accept food stamp payments have the responsibility of accepting food stamps
only for food stamp eligible merchandise.
The SAM4s SPS-300 Series offers a sophisticated routine to separate food stamp eligible
items and accept the appropriate payments. First, each PLU is pre-programmed with food
stamp eligibility status. If the customer is paying by food stamps, the operator can then recall
and display the food stamp eligible total. Depending upon local rules, sales tax can be
forgiven on any taxable food stamp eligible item. Change less than one dollar from food
stamp tender is applied to non-food stamp eligible items, or issued in cash change. If both
cash and food stamp change is due, the register displays both types of change due.
Using this system, all food stamp items are automatically sorted, with change and tax
calculated by the register. Thus, a potentially confusing transaction can be handled quickly
with little risk for errors.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Glossary • 291
Gallonage
To simplify gasoline transactions, PLUs can be designated to calculate gallons sold on fuel
purchases. The price of the fuel sold is entered as it would be in a normal “open” PLU.
However the price per gallon of fuel is entered where the PLU preset price is normally
maintained. When fuel is sold, the register will refer to the programmed price per gallon and
calculate the number of gallons sold. Both the gallons pumped and dollar amount of the gas
purchase are conveniently printed on the customer receipt and sales journal. This provides all
the necessary information for a customer that needs a receipt for gas purchases. The total of
gallons sold is also maintained on the appropriate PLU report, in the place of the PLU item
counter. Several gallonage PLUs could be placed on the keyboard to maintain records for
different pumps, or types of fuel. Thus, the dollar and gallon totals can provide a useful
security check against separate pump totals.
Groups (PLU Groups)
Groups are used to organize sets of items. For example, in a restaurant Grill Items, Drinks,
and Ice Cream items might be separated into different groups. Up to 99 group totals are
available. Group reporting is available on the group report.
HALO
The high amount lock-out (HALO) limits the amount allowed to be entered in a PLU, or
function key.
HASH
Merchants often sell non-merchandise items, such as lottery tickets, or bottle deposits, that
they do not wish to account for as reportable revenue. HASH PLUs are useful to account for
non-revenue income. They will add to the appropriate totals on the PLU report, they will add
to the transaction totals, and they will be accountable for in drawer totals, but they will not
affect the merchants, NET SALES, GROSS SALES or NON-RESETTABLE GRAND
TOTAL. As a system option, HASH can be defined to not add to the transaction (NONADD).
Link (PLU Link)
Use linked PLUs if you wish the registration a PLU to automatically cause the registration of
another PLU (for example to automatically add a bottle deposit.) Linked PLUs are set with
Program 350, PLU Link programming.
Macro
Macro keys may be programmed to record, and then later perform, up to 50 keystrokes.
For example, a macro key could be set to tender (preset tender) a common currency, such as
$5 into the cash key.
Memory Allocation
Memory allocation is a program that determines how the system memory is divided to
provide the correct features for your application. For example, you may require more or less
clerk memory, PLUs, or electronic journal memory. Memory allocation allows you to
maximize the features you need while minimizing the features you do not need.
292 • Glossary
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Mix & Match
Retailers often offer discounts when multiples of different items are purchased. For example,
the offer: “save $5 on any three bottles of wine” can be handled by a mix and match discount.
The default SPS-300 Series can accommodate up to 10 different mix and match discounts, the
total can be increased to a maximum of 100 through memory allocation.
Multiple Receipts
In some cases, for example where a mail-in rebate is offered, an extra copy of a receipt is
needed. If allowed, the receipt must be re-printed immediately, before another transaction is
started.
Negative PLUs
As you program PLUs, you will find a setting to make them negative (normally they are
positive). Positive PLUs are used for items that add to the sale. Negative PLUs are used for
items that subtract from a sale, like individual store coupons or bottle deposit credits.
NLU
Number Look-Up (NLU) refers to PLU code that is accessed when a Keyboard PLU is used.
In the default program each Keyboard PLU will look up the appropriate numeric PLU,
beginning with PLU #1 for Keyboard PLU key #1 and continuing sequentially through the
keyboard.
However, this numbering sequence may be impractical for some applications. For example,
Keyboard PLU #1 may represent a can of Diet Pepsi. The merchant may wish to have the
Keyboard PLU look up the UPC code number for Diet Pepsi, which is “120500”. Using this
program you can change the Number Look-Up (NLU) for the keyboard PLU to any 15-digit
number you choose.
No Sale
No sale is an operation to simply open the cash drawer. No sales are counted and reported on
the financial report.
Not Found PLU
For small merchants, the SPS-300 Series can build a PLU file “on the fly”. Each time an item
is scanned (or entered by PLU number) that is not in the PLU file, the operator is prompted to
enter the price and other options for the item. At the end of the day, the “Not Found PLU
Report” will allow the manager to verify the prices and update the PLU file as needed. T
Open (PLU)
Open PLUs accept price entries, rather than register a preset price. To prevent errors, you
may set a high limit (HALO) for open entries.
Override
Override is an operation used to bypass a programmed price or entry limit (HALO).
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Glossary • 293
Over-Tendering/Under-Tendering
When a payment is made less than the amount due, it is called an under-tender. After an
under-tender, the register calculates and displays the remaining balance for the sale.
Additional payments must be made until the total due is satisfied. When the sale is fully paid,
the cash drawer will then open and the receipt is completed. When a payment is made more
than the amount due, it is called an over-tender. The register will compute and display the
change due and the receipt will be completed. Note that register options can be set to allow
or disallow over-tendering for check and charge payments.
Paid Out
The Paid Out key is used to track cash paid out of the cash drawer or to record pick ups from
the cash drawer.
PLUs
Price look-ups (PLUs) are accessed by indexing a code number and pressing the PLU key, or
by pressing a keyboard PLU key. PLUs can be programmed with a preset or open price.
PLUs record an activity count and dollar total on the PLU report. PLU sales may also report
to a group.
Post Tender
Post tendering is available to help prevent cashier confusion when a customer decides to
change the tender amount. When Post Tendering is allowed, the operator can re-enter a cash
tender and the register will re-calculate the change.
To post tender after finalizing the sale, enter the cash amount presented by the customer and
then press CASH. The amount of change due to the customer is then displayed. This is a
calculation function only, and no totals or counters are updated by the use of this feature.
Preamble/Postamble Message
Programmable messages allow each merchant to customize his receipt with the store name,
address, phone number, website or other critical identification information or advertising
messages. The SAM4s SPS-300 Series allows a preamble message of up to six lines, each
with up to 24-characters, to be printed at the top of each receipt. A postamble of up to 6-lines
of 24-characters can also be printed at the bottom of the receipt.
Preset (PLU)
When a PLU is pre-programmed or pre-set with a fixed amount, the preset amount will
automatically register when the PLU is pressed or entered.
Preset Override
When a PLU is preset, it is possible to override the preset price with a different price. If the
override function is set to be allowed in the PLU program, you can simply enter a new price
and press the PLU key.
Receipt
A receipt is a printed tape given to a customer as a record of the sale transaction.
Received on Account
The Received on Account key is used to track cash received into the cash drawer or to record
294 • Glossary
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
loans to the cash drawer.
Register Number
The number of the register can be set and printed on each receipt. If the merchant uses more
than one register, or has more than one location, the register where a transaction took place or
report was taken is easily identified.
Single Item
The transaction is finalized automatically when a single item PLU is registered as the first
item in a sale. Single item status is used to speed transaction entry when an item is normally
sold in a one-item sale, for example, a pack of cigarettes, a newspaper or an admission ticket.
Split Pricing
Often merchants price items in multiples, for example 3 for $1. The register will compute the
price of items when the exact quantity is not purchased. If the customer chooses to buy 2
items at 3 for $1, enter 2, press the X/TIME key, enter 3, press the X/TIME key and then
enter the price and the PLU. The register will compute the price for the items purchased.
Stock (PLU Stock)
Each PLU reports an activity counter. Normally the activity counter increments (adds) and is
reset when a PLU Z-report is taken. You can choose to use the PLU activity counter as a
stock counter. If used as a stock counter, each PLU activity will reduce the count. A separate
program allows you to add to the stock count or enter a new stock count. Stock counts are
not reset when PLU Z-reports are taken.
Surcharge (Item)
An item percent surcharge adds a percentage to the price of an item. This addition nets the
PLU total.
Surcharge (Sale)
A sale percent surcharge adds a percentage to the entire sale.
Tare
Tares are container weights. If you are using the scale function, you can preset up to 5
different tare weights. The tare can be subtracted automatically when a specific PLU is
registered, or manually inputting the tare number and pressing the TARE key can subtract the
tare. Tare #5 can be programmed for entering tare weights manually.
Tax Computation by Rate/Tax Computation by Table
In the simplest method of tax calculation, the register is set with a tax rate (or rates) and the
taxes are computed by a percentage calculation. In some cases, a tax that is entered as a
percentage does not follow exactly the tax charts that apply in your area (even if the tax chart
is based on a percentage). In these cases, we recommend that you enter your tax using tax
table programming. This method will match tax collection exactly to the break points of your
tax table.
Tax Exempt
Tax exempt is used to exclude the tax from an entire sale.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Glossary • 295
Tax Shift
Tax shift keys are used to reverse the tax status of a PLU entry.
Tender
A tender is the register operation in which the amount of the payment is entered. If the tender
exceeds the amount due, the sale is finalized and change due is displayed.
Training Operation
Training operations do not add to PLU or function key totals. This allows an operator to
practice making entries without updating sales totals. If you wish to perform training
operations, designate one of the clerks for training. You must clear (Z) the register before the
training clerk can be used. When that clerk is signed on, the register is in “training mode”.
Transaction Number
See consecutive number.
VAT
Value-Added Tax (VAT) is a tax collection system where a portion of the item’s sale price is
tax. VAT is different than most sales taxes where tax amounts are calculated and added-on to
the sale. Value added taxes are included in the item price. Most locales in the USA do not
use a VAT system, which is used in Canada and other nations.
Void
A void operation will erase a previous item entry. It must be used inside of a sale only.
X & Z Reports
X (eXamine) reads reports without resetting and Z (Zero) reads and resets your sales totals.
296 • Glossary
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Manual Revision Record
Edition
Date published
Revision Contents
V1.0
01-31-2012
Initial Publication
V1.1
02-20-2012
Update Basic features functions; Power switch cover
options described, Added charge posting operations &
function key programs. Updated FLASH update
procedures. Default store name is “STORE_A”.
V1.2
04-26-2012
IRC Appendix information added.
V1.3
05-15-2012`
Version 1.027; Puerto Rico System Option added.
V1.4
05-16-2012
Not Found PLU operation updated. Store Name notes
added.
V1.5
06-21-2012
Updated Flash ROM Update by PC Utility
Instructions. System option added at pg 23 of options
(v1.031 or later.)
V1.6
07-23-2012
Clarified Group Program options to print requisition
on receipt.
V1.7
08-1-2012
Balancing formula updated
V1.8
9-17-2012
Tip function clarified.
V1.9
11-20-2012
Disable Tip flag added to Paid Out Function key
options. Selective program loading from SD card
added. System Option added: Manager required to
add new checks.
V.1.10
12-19-2012
Clarified IRC maximum of 8 registers.
V1.11
01-24-2013
Added rounding on cash for Canadian transactions.
See System Option pages 16 & 23.
V1.12
02-06-2013
Z Report List item “00” corrected to read “PLU
ZERO SALE”. Integrated EBT support added at
Version 1.034.
V1.13
02-27-2013
Function key program updates for MACRO, Modifier
and Charge keys (v1.046) added.
V1.14
05-01-2013
Cash Benefit function added to Charge function keys
at verson 1.034.
V1.15
05-09-2013
Time activated price levels added.
V1.16
05-13-2013
Added explanation for manual card entry: Credit, gift
EBT allowed, PIN debit not allowed. Clarified Tare
Weight program entries.
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Manual Revision Record • 297
V1.17
5-29-2013
Memory Allocation: Must allocate at least one line of
electronic journal (EJ).
V1.18
6-06-2013
Reset Mode screens updated in the Integrated
Payment Appendix.
V1.19
8-12-2013
Function key code #446 corrected. Cash Declaration
definition updated,.
V1.20
10-31-2013
Report Table added.
298 • Manual Revision Record
SAM4s SPS-300 Operator's & Programming Manual v1.20
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement